field service presentations cover · 2019. 8. 19. · 1 effective meetings for field service...

1

Contents Field Service Bag Inventory Checklist .................................................................................................................... 5

*** km 10/06 p. 8 Benefit Fully From Meetings for Field Service *** ................................................................. 6

*** km 5/90 pp. 7‐8 Use Our Literature Wisely *** COMPLETE‐DONATION ARRANGEMENT ............................ 7

*** km 4/07 p. 8 When People Are Not at Home *** ......................................................................................... 9

*** km 6/99 p. 4 Make Your Time Count *** .................................................................................................... 10

*** km 4/01 p. 8 Simplicity Is Best *** .............................................................................................................. 12

*** km 7/99 p. 4 Let’s “Get to the Point!” *** .................................................................................................. 13

*** km 2/06 p. 1 Create Opportunities to Preach *** ....................................................................................... 15

*** km 5/93 p. 8 Sharing Successfully in Our Lifesaving Ministry *** ............................................................... 16

*** km 11/04 p. 1 Can You Extend a Helping Hand? *** ................................................................................... 17

*** km 1/92 p. 8 Introductions to Get Householders to Listen *** .................................................................. 18

*** km 3/92 p. 4 Presentations That Get a Response *** ................................................................................. 19

*** km 9/92 p. 8 Presentations That Stimulate Interest *** ............................................................................. 20

*** km 5/06 p. 1 Show Personal Interest—By Being Gracious *** ................................................................... 21

*** km 4/06 p. 6 Do You Ask for Referrals? *** ................................................................................................ 22

*** km 6/94 p. 2 Question Box *** no further calls at that home ................................................................ 23

*** km 1/07 p. 1 “I’m Not Interested” *** ........................................................................................................ 24

*** km 10/96 p. 8 Prepare Your Own Magazine Presentation *** ................................................................... 25

*** km 11/06 p. 8 How to Prepare a Magazine Presentation *** ..................................................................... 27

*** km 7/05 p. 3 Help Your Children Progress in the Ministry ***.................................................................... 28

*** km 4/00 p. 8 Make Sure That You Go Back! *** ......................................................................................... 29

*** km 2/05 p. 8 Feature Magazines in Your Ministry *** ................................................................................ 30

*** km 7/93 p. 4 Effectively Using Brochures in July *** .................................................................................. 31

2

*** km 7/95 p. 4 Use a Variety of Brochures in Your Ministry *** .................................................................... 32

*** km 7/93 p. 4 Returning to Stimulate Interest in the Bible *** .................................................................... 33

*** km 1/05 p. 6 Try a Flexible Approach *** .................................................................................................... 34

*** km 2/93 p. 4 Simple and Effective Presentations *** ................................................................................. 36

*** km 5/05 p. 8 Cultivate Interest With a Magazine Route *** ....................................................................... 38

*** km 4/03 p. 8 Return Visits Lead to Bible Studies *** .................................................................................. 39

*** km 8/07 p. 3 How to Turn Magazine Placements Into Bible Studies *** .................................................... 40

*** km 4/06 p. 3 Conduct Progressive Doorstep and Telephone Bible Studies *** .......................................... 42

*** km 12/07 p. 1 Make It Your Goal to Conduct a Bible Study *** .................................................................. 43

*** km 1/06 pp. 4‐5 How to Offer the Bible Teach Book *** ............................................................................ 44

*** km 1/06 p. 6 (1) Question, (2) Scripture, and (3) Chapter *** (Bible Teach) .............................................. 47

*** km 1/06 p. 3 How to Start Studies in the Bible Teach Book *** .................................................................. 48

*** km 1/05 pp. 3‐5 Suggested Field Service Presentations *** (Various literature) ....................................... 50

*** km 1/02 pp. 3‐6 Suggested Field Service Presentations *** (Various literature) ....................................... 54

*** km 1/03 p. 3 Presentations for Draw Close to Jehovah *** ........................................................................ 59

*** km 9/05 pp. 3‐6 Conducting Progressive Bible Studies *** ......................................................................... 60

*** km 7/04 p. 1 Part 1—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies *** ................................................................. 67


*** km 11/04 p. 4 Part 3—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies *** ............................................................... 69

*** km 12/04 p. 1 Part 4—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies *** ............................................................... 70






3

*** km 6/05 p. 1 Part 10—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies *** .............................................................. 76



*** km 4/01 p. 8 Witness as a Good Neighbor *** ........................................................................................... 79

*** km 6/05 p. 4 Witnessing Effectively in Public Places *** ............................................................................ 80

*** km 7/90 p. 4 Presenting the Good News—By Telephone *** .................................................................... 81

*** km 2/01 pp. 5‐6 Successful Telephone Witnessing *** .............................................................................. 83

*** km 11/00 p. 2 What Do You Say to an Answering Machine? *** ............................................................... 86

*** km 5/03 p. 7 Question Box *** witnessing by telephone ...................................................................... 86

*** km 11/96 p. 2 Question Box *** writing letters .......................................................................................... 87

*** km 12/07 p. 8 Comfort the Brokenhearted *** .......................................................................................... 88

*** km 7/04 p. 4 How to Preach in Business Territory *** ................................................................................ 89

*** km 6/93 p. 1 Why Tracts Are So Valuable in Our Ministry Today *** ......................................................... 90

*** km 11/01 pp. 3‐4 We Have a New Tool for Starting Studies! *** (Bible Tract) .......................................... 91

*** km 4/93 p. 8 Tie In the Tracts With Other Literature *** ........................................................................... 94

*** km 6/93 p. 4 Use Tracts to Introduce the Greatest Man Book *** ............................................................. 95

*** km 12/92 pp. 3‐4 Using Tracts to Produce Beneficial Results *** .............................................................. 96

*** km 8/05 p. 4 Are You Using Handbills? *** ................................................................................................. 99

*** km 8/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Buddhist? *** ................................................................................... 99

*** km 9/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Hindu? *** ...................................................................................... 100

*** km 10/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Jewish Person? *** ....................................................................... 101

*** km 11/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Muslim? *** .................................................................................. 102

*** km 12/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to an Atheist? *** ................................................................................ 103

*** sg study 10 pp. 51‐52 pars. 9‐12 Developing the Art of Teaching *** ...................................................... 105

*** sg study 14 pp. 70‐72 pars. 4‐8 Tactful Yet Firm *** ................................................................................. 106

4

*** sg study 17 pp. 87‐88 pars. 7‐9 How to Write Letters *** ......................................................................... 107

*** sg study 18 pp. 92‐94 pars. 8‐14 Improving Your Answers *** ................................................................. 108

*** sg study 24 p. 122 Directing Attention to the Bible *** ............................................................................ 109

*** be p. 62 ‐ p. 64 How to Improve Conversation Skills *** ........................................................................... 109

*** be p. 66 ‐ p. 70 Know How You Ought to Answer *** ............................................................................... 111

*** be p. 71 ‐ p. 73 Communicating Through Letters *** ................................................................................ 113

*** be study 31 p. 190 ‐ p. 193 Respect Shown to Others *** ........................................................................ 115

*** be study 33 p. 197 ‐ p. 200 Tactful yet Firm *** ........................................................................................ 117

*** be study 48 p. 251 ‐ p. 254 Reasoning Manner *** ................................................................................... 119

*** be p. 272 ‐ p. 281 The Message We Must Proclaim *** ............................................................................ 122

*** rs p. 9 Introductions for Use in the Field Ministry *** ............................................................................... 129

*** rs pp. 15‐24 How You Might Respond to Potential Conversation Stoppers *** ....................................... 134

*** rs p. 445 Scriptures Often Misapplied *** ................................................................................................. 140

*** td 1‐44C Bible Topics for Discussion *** ................................................................................................... 141

*** w87 2/15 pp. 15‐20*** …..9 Ways to Witness ....................................................................................... 147

Index .................................................................................................................................................................. 151

5

Field Service Bag Inventory Checklist

Personal Bible

Reasoning Book

Territory Map

Good News for All Nations

Examining the Scriptures Book

Kingdom Ministry (presentation)

Pencil or Pen

Return Visit’s List

House to House Record Slip

Please Follow Up Slip

You Are Invited Slip

Magazines

Tracts

Brochures

Bible

Bible Teach Book

Offer for Month

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6

*** km 10/06 p. 8 Benefit Fully From Meetings for Field Service ***

Benefit Fully From Meetings for Field Service

1 Effective meetings for field service provide real encouragement and practical instruction before we go in the ministry. They enable us to share in group witnessing so that we can work along with others for mutual support and training. (Prov. 27:17; Eccl. 4:9, 10) What can we do to benefit fully from these meetings?

2 The Conductor: Specific information to be considered at these meetings is not normally outlined in advance. Therefore, good preparation is needed if you will be conducting. Do not automatically plan to consider the daily text, though you may choose to include it in the discussion if it directly relates to the ministry. Think about what will provide practical help for those witnessing that day. For example, you may want to discuss or demonstrate a presentation. You might choose to review something from the Reasoning book, the Ministry School book, or a recent Service Meeting part. At other times, you might consider how to deal with a challenge that may arise in your territory, or you might discuss how to cultivate interest and start Bible studies, especially if many will be making return visits. Regardless of what is considered, be enthusiastic and positive.

3 Start the meeting on time, even if you know that some will be late. Use good judgment in organizing the groups, and provide territory to those who need it. The length of the meeting should be no more than 10 to 15 minutes and shorter if it follows a congregation meeting. Before you end the meeting, all should know with whom and where they are going to work. The meeting should be concluded with prayer.

4 You Can Help: As with congregation meetings, we show respect for Jehovah and consideration for others by arriving on time. Participate in the discussion. You may let the conductor assign you to work with someone, or you may choose to make your own arrangements in advance of the meeting. If you prefer to make your own arrangements, endeavor to “widen out” by working with a variety of publishers, rather than working with close friends each time. (2 Cor. 6:11-13) Once the meeting has concluded, avoid changing the arrangements, and depart promptly for the territory.

5 The purpose of meetings for field service is the same as that of congregation meetings. They are arranged so that we can “consider one another to incite to love and fine works.” (Heb. 10:24, 25) If we strive to benefit from these meetings, we will be helped to carry out our ministry—a ‘fine work’ indeed!

[Study Questions] 1. How can meetings for field service help us?

2. What are some things the conductor might consider?

3. How long should the meeting last, and what should be accomplished during that time?

4. What will help all to benefit fully from meetings for field service?

5. What is the purpose of meetings for field service?

7

*** km 5/90 pp. 78 Use Our Literature Wisely *** COMPLETEDONATION ARRANGEMENT

Use Our Literature Wisely

1 Our organized use of literature began with distribution of 6,000 copies of the July 1, 1879, issue of the Watchtower magazine. Since then, a great variety of literature items have been printed and distributed in vast quantities.

THE COMPLETE-DONATION ARRANGEMENT 2 At the end of February 1990, it was explained that magazines and literature will be provided to

publishers and to the interested public on a complete donation basis, that is, without asking or suggesting that a specific contribution be made as a precondition to receiving an item. When literature is offered, voluntary donations will be accepted to support the worldwide work of publishing the good news. We have faith that Jehovah will bless this arrangement.—Compare Matthew 6:33.

HANDLING SITUATIONS IN THE FIELD 3 We will continue to use Topics for Conversation to stimulate interest. Where no interest is

shown, there is no need to offer the literature. We do not want to waste any of our literature by offering it to those with no interest. On the other hand, where interest is shown and the householder agrees to read the literature, it may be offered. We want to use our literature wisely.

4 The following are some remarks you might make after showing the literature: “If you would enjoy reading this publication, I would be happy to leave it with you.” Likely the householder will ask: “How much does it cost?” You could reply: “We are not engaged in a commercial work. We are not selling this literature. The work we are doing in your neighborhood today is being done voluntarily in 212 lands around the world to help people learn the way to everlasting life. If you would care to make a donation toward this work, I would be glad to accept it.”

5 When offering the magazines, you could raise questions about a specific article and then say: “I would like you to note the details in this article. If you would like to read these two magazines, I would be happy to leave them with you.” If they are accepted, you could add: “I am glad to be able to make this information available to you. I think you will find the subject truly informative. In fact, I would like to come back next week to get your viewpoint. You will note that The Watchtower is published in 107 languages and distributed in nearly 14,000,000 copies around the world. This work is all supported by voluntary donations. If you also care to make a small donation toward this educational work, we will be happy to accept it.”

6 In some cases, the subject of donations for our worldwide work may be awkward to discuss. For example, an interested householder may ask: “Are you giving it away?” We might reply: “If you

8

want to read the publication and would like to have it, yes, it’s yours. I would like to stop by next week to discuss what we have talked about and to tell you more about our worldwide work.” On subsequent visits the householder may be informed as to how our work is financed.

7 Or the householder may immediately accept the literature and reply, “Thank you.” You could respond by saying: “You are welcome. I know you will enjoy it. Many wonder how this work is financed, since we do it worldwide. Many who accept our publications have expressed appreciation for what they will learn and have volunteered a small donation to make further distribution possible. If people do that, we are pleased to accept it.”

IS THERE GENUINE INTEREST? 8 It is obviously not our purpose to distribute literature at random. We want the literature to

achieve its intended purpose, namely, to help sincere people learn more about Jehovah’s marvelous purposes. It could be wasteful to leave literature with individuals who have no appreciation for spiritual things. (Heb. 12:16) Productive distribution of literature depends upon your ability to identify genuine interest. How might such interest be shown? A kindly willingness to converse with you is a good sign. Or paying attention while you speak, responding to questions, and expressing an opinion indicate involvement in the discussion. Speaking to you in a respectful, neighborly manner suggests a kindly disposition. Following along as you read from the Bible implies a respect for God’s Word. Often, it is helpful to ask if they would read the literature being offered. Also, you might suggest a return visit to continue the conversation. A positive response is further evidence of their interest. When you observe such evidences of sincere interest, likely the individual will make good use of any literature received.

9 This adjustment in our method of work provides further evidence that “we are not peddlers of the word of God.” (2 Cor. 2:17) It also proves we are separate from the world.—John 17:14.

10 With the destruction of Babylon the Great drawing near, there are growing pressures against all religious elements. Our main concern is that the vital worldwide Kingdom-preaching work continues to move ahead without hindrance, bringing many more to salvation.—Matt. 24:14; Rom. 10:13, 14.

9

*** km 4/07 p. 8 When People Are Not at Home *** When People Are Not at Home

1 In many areas it is becoming increasingly difficult to find people at home. In these “critical times,” many are forced to work long hours just to make ends meet. (2 Tim. 3:1) Some may be away from home spending money or engaging in recreation. How can we reach such ones with the good news?

2 Keep Good Records: The first step is to make note of those who are not at home. This is especially important if you work your territory frequently. Do you make note of the name of the street, the territory number, your name, and the date? You may leave room for making additional notes when you or another publisher returns to work the not-at-homes. At the end of the witnessing period, remember to give the record or notes to the person who has the territory, unless he agrees for you to work the not-at-homes. Use a separate sheet to record any interest found that you will care for.

3 Try at a Different Time: Perhaps some who were not at home during the workday may be home in the evening or on weekends. Could you arrange your schedule to go back at a more opportune time? (1 Cor. 10:24) If not, you may be able to give the not-at-homes to a publisher who can go back at a different time. Otherwise, you might write to those who were not at home or try to reach them by telephone. Publishers whose health problems limit their share in the door-to-door work may be happy to assist you with this.

4 One case illustrates the importance of trying to contact those who are not at home. After publishers repeatedly called at one home for three years, the householder was eventually contacted. It turned out that she had been waiting all that time for a Witness to come by in order to resume the Bible study that she had before moving to that area.

5 Complete the Territory: When is a territory considered completed? Generally, this is when reasonable efforts have been made to contact someone at each home. It may be appropriate to leave a tract or an older magazine discreetly at the not-at-homes, especially in territories that are worked infrequently. The territory should be completed within four months. Then it should be checked in so that the territory servant can update his records.

6 We want as many people as possible to have an opportunity to learn to call on the name of Jehovah and be saved. (Rom. 10:13, 14) This includes those who happen to be away from their home when we call from house to house. Like the apostle Paul, make it your desire “to bear thorough witness to the good news of the undeserved kindness of God.”—Acts 20:24.

[Study Questions]

1. What is a common challenge when engaging in the door-to-door ministry?

2. How can we make sure that not-at-homes will be cared for?

3. What are some suggestions for reaching those who are not at home?

4. What illustrates the importance of calling back on not-at-homes?

5. When is a territory considered completed?

6. Why should we try to reach everyone in our territory with the good news?

10

*** km 6/99 p. 4 Make Your Time Count *** Make Your Time Count

1 Everyone has the same amount of time at his disposal each week. The portion that we devote to spreading the good news is especially valuable because it is time spent in a life-saving work. (Rom. 1:16) We show our appreciation for this by preparing well for the service planned, arriving at meetings for service on time, and leaving promptly for the territory. We would rather be preaching than waiting. Since Jehovah has taught us that “for everything there is an appointed time,” we need to make the time that we have set aside for the ministry really count.—Eccl. 3:1.

2 Manage Your Time Wisely: Many blessings come to us when we steadfastly hold to a schedule that allows for regular participation in the field ministry. Naturally, the good results that we achieve in the ministry should be proportionate to the amount of time spent in the service. With some slight adjustments to our routine, could we devote more time to the field service? For example, after magazine activity on Saturday, could we take some additional time to make a few return visits? If we have been in the field ministry for a while on Sunday, could we spend some time also making return visits or conducting a Bible study? Would it be possible to supplement our house-to-house activity with some street witnessing? In these or other ways, we may be able to improve in our service.

3 When we are out in the ministry, we can lose valuable time if we are not careful. Of course, when weather conditions are severe, a short break will refresh us and help us to keep going. Be balanced, however, since such breaks may not always be necessary.

4 In recent years it has become increasingly difficult to find people at home. To cope with this situation, many publishers do their door-to-door witnessing at a different time of day. Why not try witnessing in the late afternoon or early evening?

5 It is better if we do not visit with one another while engaging in street work. Instead, stand apart from one another and approach the people so as to start conversations with them. Thus time will be managed more effectively and greater joy will be derived from the work.

6 Seize Opportunities to Witness: When a householder said that she was not interested, a Witness asked if there was anyone else in the house with whom she might talk. This led to a conversation with the man of the house, who had been ill for many years and was largely confined to bed. The hope set out in God’s Word renewed his interest in life. He was soon out of bed, attending meetings at the Kingdom Hall, and sharing his newfound hope with others!

7 A teenage sister applied the suggestion to engage in field service during the hour before the Congregation Book Study. At her first door, she met a 13-year-old girl who listened intently and

11

took literature. The next day at school, the young sister saw this same girl. Soon thereafter, she offered to study the Bible with her, and the girl accepted.

8 Make It Quality Time: Having a regular share in field service helps us develop our skills in presenting the good news. Can you improve your ability to start a conversation at the door by using a more effective introduction? Could you become a more skillful teacher when conducting a home Bible study? By doing so, you can truly make your time in the service count and make your ministry more productive.—1 Tim. 4:16.

9 Since “the time left is reduced,” our lives should be filled with Christian works. (1 Cor. 7:29) Allotting time for the preaching activity should be high on our list of priorities. Let us have a healthy, zealous share in the ministry. Time is a wonderful asset that Jehovah has given us. Always use it wisely and make it count. [Box on page 4] Consider These Suggestions: ▪ Arrive at meetings for service on time. ▪ Within reason, keep witnessing groups small. ▪ Avoid delays in getting to the territory. ▪ Work territory when most people are at home. ▪ Work alone at times if it is safe to do so. ▪ Make return visits nearest to the door-to-door territory. ▪ Keep busy in service when others in the group are delayed at a door. ▪ Whenever possible, depending on circumstances, stay out longer than an hour.

12

*** km 4/01 p. 8 Simplicity Is Best ***

Simplicity Is Best 1 Why do young publishers often hold the attention of those with whom they share the Kingdom

message? One reason is that their expressions are simple. Some publishers may feel that to witness effectively requires an eloquent presentation. However, experience shows that a simple and clear presentation is the best.

2 Jesus proclaimed the Kingdom of God in a simple, straightforward manner and trained his disciples to do the same. (Matt. 4:17; 10:5-7; Luke 10:1, 9) He used uncomplicated introductions, questions, and illustrations to capture the attention of his listeners and reach their hearts. (John 4:7-14) We do well to imitate his example and give presentations that are easily understood.

3 The “good news of the kingdom” is the message we are to proclaim. (Matt. 24:14) Using the Kingdom as your basic theme will help keep your presentation simple. Speak of things that concern your listeners. Women are often more interested in their family than in political subjects. Of immediate concern to a father are his employment and his family’s safety. Young people are interested in their future; older people, in better health and their security. People are usually more concerned about local events than what happens in distant lands. After conversing about matters of common interest, direct attention to the blessings that obedient mankind will enjoy under God’s Kingdom rule. A few simple, well-chosen words combined with a scripture can be the best means to stir your listener’s interest.

4 You might start a conversation by saying: ▪ “No doubt you agree that mankind is plagued with many incurable diseases. But did you know that God has promised he will soon eliminate all forms of sickness, as well as death?” Allow for a response, and then read Revelation 21:3, 4.

5 With clear and simple presentations, may you reach the minds and hearts of more people in your territory, aiding them to learn about Jehovah and the prospect of enjoying everlasting life.—John 17:3.

13

*** km 7/99 p. 4 Let’s “Get to the Point!” ***

Let’s “Get to the Point!”

1 Have you ever had a householder interrupt your carefully prepared presentation with the words: “What do you want? Get to the point!” What can we learn from such an experience?

2 Many people today are impatient. They want to know who we are and why we are there. When they find out that the purpose of our visit is to discuss the Bible, they may close their minds. Bible reading and spiritual conversations are not important things in the lives of many people. How can we convince such householders that they should take a few minutes to discuss a Bible topic with us?

3 What Works Best: The key is to show the householder that the Bible provides practical solutions for the problems that concern him and to do so in as few words as possible. The most effective presentations feature a specific question designed to make the householder think, followed by a scripture that answers the question. You may enjoy trying some of the following suggestions. They are designed to help us “get to the point” quickly while arousing the interest of the householder.

4 In territory where people often say that they are not interested, raise a question that involves them personally: ▪ “As we approach the next millennium, do you feel hopeful or doubtful? [Allow for response.] The Bible predicted the unsettling events we see today as well as their outcome.” Read 2 Timothy 3:1, 2, 5 and Proverbs 2:21, 22. ▪ “There is much concern in this country about health care. Did you know that God promises that he will permanently solve all health problems?” Read Revelation 21:3, 4. ▪ “How do you think our community would benefit if everyone who lives here applied Bible principles?” Read Matthew 22:37-39.

5 Since our commission is to preach the good news of the Kingdom, whenever possible we should call attention to what the Kingdom will accomplish. You might say: ▪ “Did you know that the world’s oldest book, the Bible, foretold that there will be one government for the whole world?” Read Daniel 2:44. ▪ “What do you think conditions would be like if Jesus Christ ruled the earth?” Read Psalm 72:7, 8.

6 In territory where people are religious, you could try one of these introductions:

14

▪ “Many people suffer discrimination because of their gender, religion, or skin color. How do you think God feels about such prejudice?” Read Acts 10:34, 35. ▪ “We know that Jesus Christ performed many miracles in his day. If you could ask him to perform one more miracle, what would it be?” Read Psalm 72:12-14, 16.

7 If the householder is reluctant to open the door, you might start a conversation by saying: ▪ “Most people today are tired of hearing about problems. They want to hear about solutions. No doubt that is true of you. But where can we find real solutions to our problems?” Allow for response. Read 2 Timothy 3:16, 17.

8 Why Not Try It? Oftentimes a simple, concise question is all that is needed to arouse a householder’s interest. One woman who was formerly opposed invited two sisters into her home after one of them asked the question: “Can you identify the Kingdom that you pray for in the Lord’s Prayer?” The woman was intrigued by the question, and she accepted a Bible study. She is now a dedicated servant of Jehovah!

9 When you are speaking to a householder, be genuine with your expressions. Speak from your heart. People are more likely to respond favorably when they are convinced that we are truly interested in them.—Acts 2:46, 47.

10 The work of preaching the good news is a challenge today. Some householders are suspicious of strangers. Others lead hectic lives and have little time to spare. Yet, we can be sure that there are still many deserving ones to be found. (Matt. 10:11) Our efforts to search for them are likely to be more successful if we keep our presentations brief and “get to the point!”

15

*** km 2/06 p. 1 Create Opportunities to Preach *** Create Opportunities to Preach

1 The Christian congregation is made up of people with a wide variety of circumstances. Yet, we are united in our determination to praise Jehovah. (Ps. 79:13) If poor health or other challenging circumstances limit our share in proclaiming the good news, how can we create opportunities to preach?

2 In Daily Activities: Jesus took advantage of his everyday dealings with people to give a witness. He spoke to Matthew while passing a tax office, to Zacchaeus while traveling, and to a Samaritan woman while resting. (Matt. 9:9; Luke 19:1-5; John 4:6-10) In our daily activities, we too can turn an ordinary conversation into a witness. Having a Bible handy, along with tracts or brochures, will encourage us to be ready to speak about our hope.—1 Pet. 3:15.

3 Does impaired mobility limit your participation in the door-to-door work? Be alert to opportunities to witness to visiting medical personnel and others with whom you come in contact. (Acts 28:30, 31) If circumstances often keep you at home, have you tried witnessing by telephone or by letter? One sister regularly writes to non-Witness family members. She includes encouraging thoughts from the Bible and experiences she has had while witnessing.

4 At Work or School: Our desire to praise Jehovah will also move us to create opportunities to plant seeds of truth at work or school. An eight-year-old publisher shared with his class what he read in Awake! about the moon. After learning where he got the information, his teacher began accepting The Watchtower and Awake! on a regular basis. At the workplace, our simply keeping a copy of the Bible Teach book where others can see it may prompt questions and lead to a witness.

5 Can you think of ways to create opportunities to preach in your daily activities? By making the most of our circumstances, may we strive each day to “offer to God a sacrifice of praise.”—Heb. 13:15.

16

*** km 5/93 p. 8 Sharing Successfully in Our Lifesaving Ministry ***

Sharing Successfully in Our Lifesaving Ministry

1 The apostle Paul adapted his presentation of the good news that he “might by all means save some.” (1 Cor. 9:19-23) Likewise, we will be more successful in our ministry if we are alert to discern the householder’s interests and are prepared to adapt our discussion to his needs. This should not be difficult when offering The Watchtower and Awake! or one of our brochures.

2 After introducing yourself, you might begin by saying in your own words something like this: ▪ “Many people despair at the apparent inability of world governments to provide workable solutions to the problems of our times. Some even blame the governments for their problems. Do you think there could be a government able to care adequately for all our needs? [Allow for response.] Do you know we have a reliable promise of a government that will definitely do away with all the problems we face?” Listen carefully to the householder’s answer. Depending on what he says, be ready to branch off into one of several different presentations.

3 If there is an indication in the householder’s comments that he professes to be Christian, we could then ask if he prays the “Our Father,” or Lord’s Prayer. If he answers in the affirmative, we could recite the model prayer to the point where it says, “Let your kingdom come. Let your will take place, as in heaven, also upon earth.” (Matt. 6:9, 10) This proves that someday Jehovah’s will is going to be done here on earth. Reference can then be made to an appropriate article in The Watchtower or Awake! or to a brochure that follows through on this thought, such as page 3 of The Government That Will Bring Paradise.

4 If the householder evidences no faith in God, you could refer to Hebrews 3:4 and then turn to page 4 of the brochure Does God Really Care About Us? Read paragraphs 1 and 2 and ask the question listed at the bottom of the page. Or you could tie in appropriate material from a current magazine.

5 If the householder appears satisfied with his lot in life, you could raise the question: ▪ “Why should we seriously consider what the Bible says about the future of government?” Then we could use the information found in the Reasoning book on pages 154 and 155, mentioning briefly one or more of the eight reasons provided therein. If the householder demonstrates interest, use the tract Will This World Survive?, beginning with the first paragraph on page 2, to further the conversation.

6 Your initial call will not be entirely successful if you do not whet the appetite of the householder for another visit. Therefore, be certain to ask an interesting question and promise to answer it when you return.

7 From the material above, select what you feel comfortable in saying. Adjust these suggestions to fit your territory. Become familiar with the brochures, tracts, and magazine articles you are going to use so that you can quickly adapt your discussion to the needs of the householder. May we all prepare our presentations diligently “for the sake of the good news” and thus share successfully in this lifesaving ministry.—1 Cor. 9:23.

17

*** km 11/04 p. 1 Can You Extend a Helping Hand? *** Can You Extend a Helping Hand?

1 Jehovah is always looking for ways to extend a helping hand to his loyal servants. (2 Chron. 16:9; Isa. 41:10, 13) Likening him to a caring shepherd, Isaiah wrote: “With his arm he will collect together the lambs; and in his bosom he will carry them. Those giving suck he will conduct with care.” (Isa. 40:11) Consider some ways in which we can imitate Jehovah’s loving concern.

2 Reach Out to New Ones: We can extend a helping hand by inviting new ones to enjoy upbuilding association with us. (Prov. 13:20) Recalling how others reached out to him when he began associating with the congregation, one brother said: “On several occasions, a family included me in their family study. As I progressed, a young pioneer couple regularly invited me to join them for full days in the ministry. We always had great spiritual conversations.” He added: “Before becoming a Christian, I used to go out on Friday and Saturday nights. But the time I spent with the brothers filled my need for association.” The loving interest of the congregation helped this brother to become well rooted and stabilized in the faith, and he now serves as a member of the Bethel family.—Col. 2:6, 7.

3 Build One Another Up: We may discern an opportunity to extend a helping hand when our brothers face challenging circumstances. Could you arrange to do telephone witnessing with an infirm publisher or invite him to accompany you on a Bible study, perhaps even bringing the student to his home? Might a parent with small children appreciate a helping hand when sharing in the ministry? Are there timid ones who would welcome your assistance when making return visits or when engaging in some other facet of the ministry? Loving interest in our brothers will move us to look for ways to build them up.—Rom. 14:19.

4 As we imitate Jehovah’s tender concern for his servants, we strengthen one another, help draw the congregation together in love, and glorify our heavenly Father.—Eph. 4:16.

18

*** km 1/92 p. 8 Introductions to Get Householders to Listen ***

Introductions to Get Householders to Listen

1 What is the most important part of your house-to-house presentation? Most of us would agree that it is the introduction. If you are unsuccessful in arousing the householder’s interest within the first 30 seconds or so, he will probably terminate the conversation.

2 What factors should you consider in preparing an effective introduction? Analyze the customs and needs of the people you are likely to meet. Is it customary to exchange pleasantries, or will you be expected to come quickly to the point? Are there many young couples in your area? What are their concerns? Are people in your neighborhood conscious of problems facing mankind in general?

You might get them to listen by saying something like this:

▪ “Good morning. My name is ————. I’m bothered when I read about people starving and being killed in wars. Are you?” Other questions that may help start a conversation are: “What is the solution to the world’s problems?” “Do you think anyone can rid the earth of today’s problems?” “Suppose a ruler had qualifications like these mentioned at Isaiah 9:6, 7? [Read and comment on scripture.]”

3 In some territories, people may show greater concern for their home and family than for global matters such as world peace.

You might arouse interest by asking:

▪ “What kind of life do you see for yourself and your family in ten years? The Bible’s view of the future is most encouraging because it foretells the coming of a ruler who will govern by perfect standards. Notice what Isaiah 9:6, 7 says about him.”

4 Do you live in an area where crime and safety are the topic of the day? Some may lend a hearing ear if you use the first introduction under “Crime/Safety” on page 10 of the Reasoning book.

You could say:

▪ “Hello. We’re talking with folks about the matter of personal safety. There is a lot of crime around us, and it affects our lives.” Then a question such as “What is the solution?” or “Do you think anyone can rid the earth of these problems?” or “What if a ruler had qualifications like these?” may help start a conversation. You could then read Isaiah 9:6, 7.

5 All of us, including young people of school age, can use these simple one-scripture presentations. In fact, you may wish to try one when offering magazines. Remember, our goal is to assess the extent of the householder’s interest before offering literature. Do you not agree that such a Scriptural presentation would be a fine way to discern whether our listener manifests genuine interest? We are sure that many will enjoy using these presentations during January, both when offering magazines and when presenting the regular offer for the month.

6 If you make effective use of the first 30 seconds of your visit, both by your demeanor and by your introduction, you will likely achieve the important goal of getting householders to listen.

19

*** km 3/92 p. 4 Presentations That Get a Response *** Presentations That Get a Response

1 Presentations that get a response are those that clearly show how the subject concerns the householder, that it is something he needs or can use. Throughout your conversation, help the householder to realize, “This involves me.” In preparing a presentation, we should ask ourselves: ‘What subjects are of greatest concern to people in my territory? What are their needs? How can I present the message to show that Jehovah has their needs in mind?’ Listed below are a few things that are of vital interest to people today. Can you use one of these or something similar in your presentation? Note also how points from the Revelation Climax book can be tied in.

2 Concern About Lack of Happiness: “We are speaking with people who are truly concerned with the quality of life in our community. Although people may have material necessities, many are not really happy with their lot in life. Do you think it is possible to have a truly happy life? [Allow for reply.] One of the keys to happiness is found in the Bible at Revelation 1:3. [Read.] Understanding what Revelation says about the future can bring you happiness. Note just one of its prophecies.” Read Revelation 21:3, 4 and then point to the illustration on page 302 of the Revelation Climax book.

3 Concern About the Future: “We are endeavoring to share with our neighbors a positive view of the future. Is that the way you try to look at life? [Allow for reply.] According to the Bible, we have reason to be optimistic if we do what it says at Revelation 1:3.”

4 Concern About Maintaining Good Health: “Many in our neighborhood are conscious of maintaining good health. Despite the precautions we take, however, we still suffer from sickness. Would you like to live in a world where everyone would enjoy perfect health and vitality? As unbelievable as this might seem, the Bible book of Revelation speaks of such a time and tells us that it is in the near future.” Read Revelation 21:3, 4. You could then point out the picture on pages 308-9 of the Revelation Climax book, showing how people will partake of the provisions for life during Christ’s Thousand Year Reign.

5 Concern About Pollution and the Environment: “In speaking with our neighbors, we have found that many are concerned about how our air, water, and food are being polluted. Do you think that the governments will ever be able to put a stop to this? [Allow for comment.] It is encouraging to note what the Bible says will happen to those who are ruining the earth.” Read Revelation 11:18b. Point out that besides removing those ruining the earth, it is God’s purpose for the meek ones to make the earth a paradise, as indicated at Psalm 37:10, 11 or Isaiah 65:21, 22.

6 For Those Religiously Inclined: “We are asking our neighbors a question: Do you think the book of Revelation was meant to be understood, or was it always to remain a mystery? [Allow for comment.] Many share your view. Notice what the Bible itself says at Revelation 1:3.”

7 As you earnestly endeavor to reach the heart of your listeners, those who are hungering for truth and righteousness will respond.—Matt. 5:3, 6.

20

*** km 9/92 p. 8 Presentations That Stimulate Interest ***

Presentations That Stimulate Interest

1 We should always display a warm, personal interest in the people we meet in the field ministry. Asking for their opinion on matters demonstrates our respect for their viewpoint. The subject we introduce and the questions we raise may stimulate their thinking and cause them to want to learn more about God and his purpose for mankind.

2 During September we will be directing attention to the truth about creation as we offer the book Life—How Did It Get Here? By Evolution or by Creation? Take time to review this publication personally, and choose specific points to highlight. When discussing information in the Creation book, open it and hand it to the householder. Refer to specific subjects and illustrations. Be enthusiastic in demonstrating the value of this fascinating publication.

3 After warmly introducing yourself, you could say:

▪ “In this modern, scientific world, is it reasonable to believe there is a God who created us and this beautiful earth on which we live? [Allow for response.] When we consider the vastness and wonders of the earth and the entire universe, we are impressed with its order and design. Does this not testify to the existence of a Creator? Notice the Bible’s reasoning on this matter. [Read Hebrews 3:4.] Logically, every building had a designer and builder. [Take out the Creation book and turn to the illustration on page 114.] Our universe is awe inspiring! Do you think it could have come into existence by itself?” Then turn to page 122 and read the caption below the picture of a watch. The illustration and scripture quoted on page 127 could also be used. Additional helpful points can be found in the Reasoning book, pages 84-8.

4 Or you might say:

▪ “What do you think is necessary for mankind to find true peace and happiness on this earth? [Allow for response.] The Bible says that we must fear God and acknowledge him as the Creator of heaven and earth.” Read Revelation 14:7, and then open the Creation book to pages 140 and 141, possibly reading paragraphs 24 and 25, where it explains that the earth was designed for human habitation. If the householder’s interest warrants further conversation, turn to chapter 19 and explain how an earthly paradise will soon be a reality.

5 If the householder expresses doubts about the existence of a Creator, you might say:

▪ “Many people share your feelings, especially in view of all the suffering in the world. If there is a God, why would he permit suffering? Can you think of any reasonable explanation?” Depending on the response, you may be able to continue by using chapter 16 of the Creation book to further the discussion. Or if he listens with limited interest, you might just highlight a specific point or two from the article “Why Do Good People Suffer?” in the September 15, 1992, issue of The Watchtower. Additional helpful replies on this question can be found in the Reasoning book, pages 399-400. At times it may be appropriate to leave the tract Why You Can Trust the Bible.

6 Our objective is not only to stimulate interest in the Kingdom message but also to start Bible studies. How pleased we are to have this beautifully illustrated book that explains the truth about creation and honors our Grand Creator! May we make good use of it in stimulating the interest of honesthearted people we meet during September.

21

*** km 5/06 p. 1 Show Personal Interest—By Being Gracious *** Show Personal Interest—By Being Gracious

1 “Jehovah is gracious.” (Ps. 145:8) Although he is the Universal Sovereign, he is kind, considerate, and courteous in his dealings with imperfect humans. (Gen. 13:14; 19:18-21, 29) We can enhance our presentation of the good news by imitating our gracious God. (Col. 4:6) This involves more than simply being polite and respectful in our speech.

2 From Door to Door: What if we visit the householder at an inopportune time or when he is too busy to speak with us? We do well to acknowledge such circumstances by keeping our presentation very brief or by offering to return at another time. We kindly refrain from insisting that people accept literature if they choose to decline. Consideration for others will also prompt us to show respect for their property, such as by closing gates and doors and by training our children to do the same. We should make sure that any literature left at not-at-homes is out of sight. Indeed, graciousness will move us to treat others just as we would want them to treat us.—Luke 6:31.

3 In Street Work: While engaging in street work, we can show courtesy by not blocking the flow of pedestrians and by not congregating in front of businesses. We will be sensitive to the circumstances of others, seeking to speak with those who may have a few minutes rather than those who are clearly in a hurry. At times, we may need to speak up in order to be heard over street noise. Yet, we should do so with dignity, not calling attention to ourselves.—Matt. 12:19.

4 When Telephone Witnessing: Consideration for others will move us to do telephone witnessing in a place where background noise can be controlled. We show good manners when we readily identify ourselves and explain the reason for our call. Speaking directly into the mouthpiece and maintaining a pleasant tone will help to engage others in an upbuilding Scriptural conversation. (1 Cor. 14:8, 9) By being kind, considerate, and courteous in these various ways, we imitate our gracious God, Jehovah.

22

*** km 4/06 p. 6 Do You Ask for Referrals? *** Do You Ask for Referrals?

If you are currently conducting a Bible study, why not ask the student if any of his friends, relatives, or acquaintances would also enjoy learning what the Bible teaches? Often several names are given. With the student’s permission, you could mention his name when you visit those individuals to offer a Bible study. You might say, “[Name of student] has enjoyed studying the Bible, and he thought that you too might like to benefit from our free Bible study program.” Then briefly demonstrate how the study is conducted, using the Bible Teach book.

If you have a student who is making good progress, you might encourage him to describe the study arrangement to friends and family members who might be interested. He could invite them to sit in on his study. Or if that is not convenient, he could arrange for you to meet with them to demonstrate the study arrangement. Doing this would encourage the student to begin sharing his Bible knowledge with others.

Those on whom you make regular return visits may also provide you with referrals, even if they themselves have not yet accepted a regular Bible study. When you offer them a copy of the Bible Teach book, you could simply ask, “Do you know anyone else who would enjoy having a copy of this publication?”

In view of the urgency of the times, we want to use every possible means to help people hear and accept the good news. Do you ask for referrals?

23

*** km 6/94 p. 2 Question Box *** no further calls at that home

Question Box

▪ How should matters be handled when a householder insists that Jehovah’s Witnesses make no further calls at that home?

When we encounter a sign at the door that strictly prohibits calls of a religious nature and specifically mentions Jehovah’s Witnesses, it may be best to respect the householder’s wishes and avoid knocking.

Sometimes we come upon a sign prohibiting salesmen or solicitors. Since we are doing charitable religious work, that does not really apply to us. It would be appropriate to go ahead and knock at such doors. If the householder objects, we can tactfully explain why we feel that such signs do not apply in our case. If the householder then makes it clear that the prohibition includes Jehovah’s Witnesses, we will respect his wishes.

When we are working the territory, a householder may become visibly upset and emphatically insist that we do not call again. If he refuses to reason on the matter, we should comply with this request. A dated note should be placed in the territory envelope so that publishers working the territory in the future will avoid calling at that address.

Such homes are not to be avoided indefinitely. The present occupants may move away. We may contact another family member who will respond favorably. There is also the possibility that the householder to whom we spoke will have a change of heart and become more agreeable to having us call. So after some time a tactful inquiry should be made of the occupants to determine their current feelings.

The territory file should be reviewed once a year, making a list of the homes where we have been advised not to call. Under the direction of the service overseer, some tactful, experienced publishers can be assigned to visit these homes. It could be explained that we are calling to inquire if the same householder still lives there. The publisher should be familiar with the material in the Reasoning book, pages 15-24, entitled “How You Might Respond to Potential Conversation Stoppers.” If there is a reasonable response, future calls can be made in the usual way. If the householder continues to be antagonistic, no further calls should be made until the following year. The local body of elders can decide if the circumstances in a particular case make it advisable to handle things differently.

24

*** km 1/07 p. 1 “I’m Not Interested” ***

“I’m Not Interested”

1 That is a common reaction to our message in some areas. What will help us to avoid becoming disheartened when faced with apathy in the territory? How might we be able to stimulate interest in the good news?

2 Maintain Joy: Remembering why many are apathetic will help us to maintain joy. People who were taught the theory of evolution or who were raised in an atheistic society may not have considered the value of the Bible. Others may be disillusioned by the hypocrisy they have observed in religion. For some, their apathy may mirror their frustration and hopelessness. (Eph. 2:12) Some ‘take no note’ because they are weighed down with the anxieties of life.—Matt. 24:37-39.

3 Regardless of the negative reaction of some, we can have joy in the ministry, knowing that our efforts glorify Jehovah. (1 Pet. 4:11) In addition, talking about the truth, even to those who do not yet appreciate it, strengthens our own faith. Let us endeavor to view people in the territory as Jehovah does. He felt sorry for the people of Nineveh who did not “know the difference between their right hand and their left.” (Jonah 4:11) Those living in our territory need the good news! Therefore, we should not give up but should seek ways to stimulate their interest in the Bible’s message.

4 Discuss Local Concerns: Perhaps you could bring up a matter of local concern in your introduction and ask the householder to express his views. Listen as he speaks, then show him the Bible’s comforting message in response to his concerns. After a local tragedy, one Witness expressed his sincere regrets at each door. “Suddenly, the people started talking,” he said. “I had many fine conversations that day because I showed interest in their lives.”

5 Each problem facing mankind will be solved by God’s Kingdom. Try to discern the one that most concerns the householder. He may allow you to explain the Bible’s message of hope. If not, he may be willing to listen “even another time.”—Acts 17:32.

25

*** km 10/96 p. 8 Prepare Your Own Magazine Presentation ***

Prepare Your Own Magazine Presentation

1 We appreciate the Watchtower and Awake! magazines for their timely and informative articles, which cover everything from world issues to “the deep things of God.” (1 Cor. 2:10) All of us recall many new and upbuilding things we have read in these journals, which Jehovah is using in progressively revealing the truth. (Prov. 4:18) We want to be eager to distribute them as widely as possible.

2 Analyze Your Territory: What type of people live in your area? If their pace of life is fast, you may need to prepare a presentation that is brief and to the point. If you have territory where the pace of life is less hurried, you may be able to say more. If most householders work during the day, you may have better success calling at their homes in the late afternoon or early evening. You might contact some in the daytime through street witnessing or working from store to store. Some publishers get good results by approaching people informally in parking lots and city parks.

3 Acquaint Yourself With the Magazines: Read each issue as soon as you receive it. Select the articles that you feel might appeal to the people in your territory. What subjects concern them? Look for a specific point that you can quote from the article you plan to feature. Think of a question that you can raise to stimulate interest. Pick out a timely scripture to read to the householder if you get the opportunity to do so. Think about what you might say to mention the donation arrangement and how you could lay the groundwork for a return visit.

4 Prepare Your Opening Words: Carefully choose the words you plan on using to introduce yourself and to start a conversation. Some have found success with this opening comment: “I’ve read a fascinating article in this magazine, and I want to share it with others.” Many open with a question that focuses on the talking point they plan to use. For example:

5 If highlighting an article on the prevalence of crime, you could ask: ▪ “What will it take for us to be able to sleep at night without fear of being robbed or harmed?” Explain that you have some information about a remedy for this problem. The remedy will soon eliminate every other kind of social disorder as well. Refer to something in the magazine that offers such a hope. When you call back, you can draw the householder’s attention to chapter 1 of the Knowledge book.

6 When offering an article on family life, you might say this: ▪ “Most parents find it a real challenge to raise a family these days. Many books have been written on the subject, but even the experts don’t agree. Is there anyone who can provide reliable

26

guidance?” Share a specific comment from the magazine that demonstrates the wise counsel found in the Bible. When you make the return visit, discuss the Scriptural thoughts on rearing children covered in the Knowledge book, pages 145-8.

7 In featuring an article on a social problem, you could say: ▪ “Many people feel under pressure because of the stressful times in which we live. Do you think God intended that we live this way?” Point to an article that shows how to cope with today’s problems or that gives reasons to look forward to a future that will be free from anxiety. On your next visit, discuss the illustration and caption on pages 4-5 of the Knowledge book, and then lead right into a home Bible study.

8 Adapt to the Householder: You will meet people having different interests and backgrounds. Prepare a basic presentation that you can adjust for each householder. Have in mind how you might adapt what you say to a man, a woman, an older person, or a youth. There are no rigid rules about what you must say. Use whatever is comfortable for you and gets results. However, be enthusiastic, speak from the heart, and be a good listener. Those who are “rightly disposed” will sense your sincerity and will respond favorably.—Acts 13:48.

9 Assist One Another: By sharing ideas with one another, we learn new ways to express ourselves. Practicing our presentations together gives us experience and confidence. (Pr. 27:17) If you rehearse what you are going to say, you will feel more at ease at the door. It is vital that parents take the time to help their children prepare, listen as they practice their presentation, and offer suggestions for improvement. New ones can benefit by working with more experienced publishers.

10 Preparing your own magazine presentation need not be difficult. It is simply a matter of getting something specific in mind to say and then expressing it in an appealing manner. With initiative and forethought, you can work up a fine presentation that will get a good response.

11 Magazine distribution is one of the primary ways we spread the Kingdom message worldwide. If you can get The Watchtower and Awake! into the hands of sincere people, the magazines can speak for themselves. Always remember their value and how their message can save lives. This kind of ‘doing good and sharing of things with others’ is what pleases Jehovah very much.—Heb. 13:16.

27

*** km 11/06 p. 8 How to Prepare a Magazine Presentation ***

How to Prepare a Magazine Presentation

1 ‘Why should we prepare magazine presentations,’ you may wonder, ‘since presentations appear in each issue of Our Kingdom Ministry?’ While many have found these sample presentations to be helpful, personal preparation is still needed. A presentation that is effective in one territory may not be practical in another. Therefore, we should not feel obligated to present the magazines exactly as worded in the sample presentations. Even if we choose to use a sample presentation, it is best to put the thoughts in our own words.

2 Choose an Article: Having first read the magazine, choose an article that is appropriate for your territory and that you especially enjoyed. Your conviction and enthusiasm when presenting the article may move the householder to want to read it too. Though you will likely feature an article that has wide appeal in the local territory, be well acquainted with the other articles in the magazine as well. This will allow you to adjust your presentation if you encounter someone who may be more interested in another subject.

3 Ask a Question: Next, carefully prepare your opening words. Your introduction is important. It may be helpful to ask the householder a thought-provoking question to stimulate his interest in the article that you have chosen to feature. Viewpoint questions usually work best. Avoid asking something that could make the householder uncomfortable or defensive.

4 Read a Scripture: Finally, choose a scripture to read if the householder’s circumstances allow, perhaps one found in the article you will feature. Reading a scripture will help the householder to see that our message is from God’s Word. (1 Thess. 2:13) The scripture will also give him a witness even if he refuses the magazines. Some have awakened the householder’s interest by reading a scripture before asking a specific question. You might introduce the scripture by saying, “I would like to get your opinion on what is stated in this Bible verse.” Then call the person’s attention to a related point in the magazine, and make a brief comment to stimulate his interest further before offering it.

5 There are no rigid rules about what to say when offering the magazines. Generally, it is best to keep your presentation simple and brief. Use an approach that is comfortable for you and that gets good results. Focus on the excelling value of the magazines, and be enthusiastic. If you are well prepared, you will be more effective in placing The Watchtower and Awake! with those who are “rightly disposed for everlasting life.”—Acts 13:48.

[Study Questions]

1. Why is it better to prepare a personal magazine presentation rather than simply to memorize a sample given in Our Kingdom Ministry?

2. What is involved in determining which article you will feature?

3. What type of introduction do you use for the best results?

4. What are the benefits of reading a scripture to the householder when the circumstances allow?

5. What basic guidelines should you keep in mind when preparing a magazine presentation?

28

*** km 7/05 p. 3 Help Your Children Progress in the Ministry *** Help Your Children Progress in the Ministry

1 Christian parents shoulder the serious responsibility of training their children in the ministry from a young age. This may be achieved in a number of ways. Some children are able to recite an appropriate Bible text even before they are able to read. This can have a powerful effect on listeners. As little ones get older, they can do even more in the ministry. How can you parents help your children to share in giving a witness? Perhaps the following suggestions will be of further help.

2 After a greeting, you might say: ▪ “My son, [his name], has a meaningful scripture that he would like to call to your attention.” Your child may say: “This scripture in Psalms taught me God’s name. [Child reads or recites Psalm 83:18.] These magazines talk about what Jehovah God will do for us. May I leave them with you?” You could conclude the conversation by explaining how the worldwide work is supported.

3 Or you might try this approach: ▪ “Hello. I am training my daughter, [her name], to show concern for others in the community. She would like to share a brief Bible message with you.” She could say: “One way I like to help people is by sharing the Bible’s hope for the future. [Child reads or recites Revelation 21:4.] These magazines explain what God’s Kingdom will do for us. I think you will enjoy reading them.”

4 Consistently using a simplified presentation allows children to gain confidence in their ability to share the Kingdom message. Practice sessions that focus on speaking clearly and with adequate volume will equip them to speak under a variety of circumstances. Good advance preparation and sincere commendation will help little ones to express their faith.

5 With such encouragement, many young ones have qualified as unbaptized publishers. What a joy it is to see our children making progress in the Christian ministry!—Ps. 148:12, 13.

29

*** km 4/00 p. 8 Make Sure That You Go Back! *** Make Sure That You Go Back!

1 “What a good conversation! I’ll have to remember to make a return visit there.” Have you ever said those words and later forgotten where the person lives? If so, you know that the only way you can make sure that you go back is to put it in writing.

2 Write It All Down: While a conversation with an interested person is still fresh in your mind, take a moment to write down all the pertinent information about the call. Note the person’s name and how you will recognize him. Put down his address, but do not guess at it—check to be sure that what you write is correct. Note the subject you talked about, any scriptures that you read, and what literature was placed.

3 If you left the person with a question to be answered on the next call, write it down. Did you learn something about the person, his family, or his religion? If so, make a notation of this. Then the next time you call, your making mention of it will demonstrate your personal interest in the individual. Finally, include the day and time that you made the initial call and when you said you would return. By making good notes, you will have clear reminders and will be less likely to forget your promise to return.—1 Tim. 1:12.

4 Once your record is complete, put it with the rest of your field service equipment—book bag, Bible, Reasoning book, and literature—so that it will always be handy. It is best to record not-at-homes on house-to-house records that are separate from those that you use to make note of your return visits. Of course, regardless of the work you put into keeping track of return visits, the important thing is to make sure that you go back!

5 Think About the Person: When preparing for the ministry, review your return visit notes. Give thought to each individual and what approach might best be used when making the next call. Think of how to develop the person’s interest into a home Bible study. Such planning can increase your productivity as a minister of the good news and, hence, your personal joy.—Prov. 21:5a.

6 So the next time you find a listening ear, do not reason that you can easily remember the call. Instead, write it down, review your notes, keep thinking about the person, and then make sure that you go back!

30

*** km 2/05 p. 8 Feature Magazines in Your Ministry *** Feature Magazines in Your Ministry

1 “Interesting, timely, and uplifting.” “The most encouraging journals I’ve ever read.” These comments well describe how readers the world over feel about The Watchtower and Awake! Indeed, our magazines have proved to be invaluable tools in reaching “all sorts of men” with the good news.—1 Tim. 2:4.

2 A career-oriented man obtained an Awake! magazine on a subject that interested him. Later, he read the accompanying issue of The Watchtower, which contained an article that prompted him to scrutinize his lifelong belief in the Trinity. This sparked his interest. Six months later he was baptized. Another man regularly received the magazines but never read them. His wife, on the other hand, avoided the Witnesses but read the magazines left with her husband. Her heart was touched by the Bible’s promise of an earthly paradise filled with righteous people. In time, she, her son, and her sister became servants of Jehovah.

3 Offer Them as a Set: As the foregoing examples show, we cannot be sure who will read our magazines or what may arouse their interest. (Eccl. 11:6) Therefore, it is advantageous to offer The Watchtower and Awake! together as a set, even though we will generally highlight only one magazine in our presentation. In certain circumstances, it may be appropriate to offer several different issues of our magazines on a visit.

4 It is beneficial to schedule one day each week to share in magazine work. On the 2005 Calendar of Jehovah’s Witnesses, every Saturday is designated as “Magazine Day.” Of course, since local and personal circumstances vary, some may set aside another day to focus on offering our journals. Is this part of your weekly schedule?

5 Set a Personal Goal: Setting a personal monthly goal of magazine placements can help us to be more magazine conscious. Do you have a magazine route? Do you offer magazines to those whom you meet in the ministry? Could you offer magazines in street work, in business territory, and in public places? Do you carry magazines with you when traveling, shopping, and going to appointments? Take advantage of every appropriate opportunity to help others benefit from The Watchtower and Awake!

6 We might also make it our aim to place older issues that we have on hand. Even if magazines are not placed within a month or two of the issue date, the information retains its value. Get them into the hands of interested ones. For millions of people, the Watchtower and Awake! magazines have been “a word . . . at the right time.” (Prov. 25:11) Let us use them to help millions more come to know and serve Jehovah.

[Study Questions]

1, 2. How have The Watchtower and Awake! touched people’s lives?

3. What is the advantage of offering the magazines as a set?

4. How might we schedule magazine work?

5. What opportunities to place magazines should we be alert to, and what can help us to do so?

6. How can we make good use of older issues of the magazines?

31

*** km 7/93 p. 4 Effectively Using Brochures in July ***

Effectively Using Brochures in July

1 To speed up the disciple-making work, the organization has generously supplied many different publications. Among these are brochures that deal with specific themes, such as God’s purpose for the earth, the Trinity, God’s name, the Kingdom government, and God’s permission of wickedness. How can we use brochures effectively to help people in our territory?

2 The brochure Does God Really Care About Us? explains logically that a new world free from suffering is near. How might we introduce it? Suggestions can be found in the Reasoning book under the main heading “Suffering,” starting on page 393, or you may prefer the introduction on page 12 under the heading “Injustice/Suffering.”

3 You might say: ▪ “Have you ever wondered: ‘Does God really care that humans experience injustice and suffering?’” Allow for response. Read Psalm 72:12-14. Then turn to page 22 of the brochure Does God Really Care About Us? and discuss the bold headings in part 10, as well as the meaning of the illustration on page 23. If the brochure is refused, why not offer a tract, such as Comfort for the Depressed or Life in a Peaceful New World?

4 Good government is a topic of concern today. Many wonder if man’s rule will unite the world. Helpful information is found under “Government,” beginning on page 152 of the Reasoning book.

5 You could ask: ▪ “Is it possible for humans to establish a government that will really bring lasting happiness?” Allow for reply, then ask: “What does the record of human history show?” Turn to Jeremiah 10:23, or turn to page 152 of the Reasoning book and read appropriate texts and comments. Thereafter, turn to pages 24 and 25 in the Government brochure and consider illustrations and scriptures. Explain how God’s government will unite people globally. If the householder does not accept the brochure, you may offer the tract Will this World Survive?

6 If there is fear of crime in your neighborhood, the following introduction may be appealing. 7 You could say:

▪ “Many people wonder, ‘If God is love, why does he permit wickedness?’ Have you wondered about this too?” Allow for comment, then say: “Notice that Proverbs 19:3 cautions against blaming God for the bad things people do.” After reading the text, direct attention to page 15 of the brochure “Look! I Am Making All Things New” and read paragraph 27. This could lead into a discussion of the succeeding paragraphs.

8 Using brochures to teach sheeplike people about the good news is something that all of us can do. We can help people from all walks of life to associate with God’s organization. It is our privilege to share in the preaching activity as we effectively use our timely brochures.

32

*** km 7/95 p. 4 Use a Variety of Brochures in Your Ministry ***

Use a Variety of Brochures in Your Ministry

1 People today are interested in a variety of subjects. As you engage in field service during July, you could have with you several different brochures, using a specific one that would appeal to people in the territory. Perhaps you would like to try one of these presentations:

2 In offering the brochure “The Government That Will Bring Paradise,” you could ask: ▪ “What do you think the world would be like if God were the only ruler? [Allow for response.] Having God take over the rulership of the earth is exactly what we are asking for when we pray the Lord’s Prayer, or Our Father, that Jesus Christ taught us. [Turn to page 3, and read the first paragraph, which quotes Matthew 6:10.] If you would like to live in a world like that, you should read this brochure.” Offer to leave it.

3 “When Someone You Love Dies” could be featured in this way: ▪ “Do you think the day will ever come when none of us will have to lose a loved one in death? [Allow for response.] This beautifully written brochure has comforted millions with the Bible’s sure promise that such a day is coming in the near future. [Turn to page 5, and read the fifth paragraph, including 1 Corinthians 15:21, 22. Then turn to the illustration on page 30.] Here the artist has captured the joy we may experience in welcoming back our dead loved ones in the resurrection. But where will that happy scene take place? This brochure will show you the Bible’s answer to that question.” If the brochure is accepted, you might add: “I would like to return later and discuss this subject further.”

4 You might feature the brochure “Look! I Am Making All Things New,” using this direct approach to start a Bible study: ▪ “Many people have questions about the Bible. You may have wondered about the answer to one of these. [Open to page 30.] This last question has stirred the interest of many: ‘How may you prepare for everlasting life in Paradise?’” If you discuss paragraphs 57-8 on pages 29-30 and read Revelation 21:3, 4, you will have laid the groundwork for starting a Bible study. Conclude by leaving the brochure and arranging for a return visit when you can discuss some of the other questions.

5 You might like to try this simple presentation with the brochure “The Divine Name That Will Endure Forever”: ▪ “One of the first things I learned from the Bible was God’s name. Do you know what it is? [Allow for response.] Let me show you. It’s here in the Bible at Psalm 83:18. [Read.] This brochure shows how God’s name, Jehovah, appears in many different languages. [Show the box on page 8.] If you would like to learn more about Jehovah and his purposes, you should read this brochure.” Hand the brochure to the householder.

6 With such a variety of fine brochures to use, we certainly are well equipped “to tell good news to the meek ones.”—Isa. 61:1.

33

*** km 7/93 p. 4 Returning to Stimulate Interest in the Bible ***

Returning to Stimulate Interest in the Bible

1 Sometimes we meet people in field service who show some interest in the good news but are too busy to talk with us at the moment we call. Do we try to call back at another time to share the Kingdom message with them? Or perhaps we have an interesting conversation with a householder, but he does not accept any literature. Do we return to speak further with him about the truth?

2 It is important to cover our territory thoroughly and to follow up on all interest we may find. Do we make return visits only on those who accept a book or the magazines? If so, we could be overlooking some interested people. We certainly would not want to judge someone as being unworthy of further spiritual encouragement just because he did not accept literature. (Compare Romans 14:4.) Perhaps after our visit, a householder may think about what we said or may come to appreciate the effort we made to visit him. He may be more favorably disposed when we return.

3 When calling back on a person who was busy, you might say: ▪ “I’m glad to see you once again. The last time I was here, we couldn’t talk because you didn’t have time. I can see that you are a busy person, and I’ll be brief. Likely you are concerned about good health for yourself and for those you love. Well, did you know that God has promised to put an end to all sickness? Wouldn’t that be wonderful? [Allow for response.] Notice the point in paragraph 4 of this brochure entitled ‘Look! I Am Making All Things New.’” If time permits, read the paragraph and then consider one of the scriptures at the bottom of page 4 that depicts conditions in the new world. If the householder is receptive, you may be able to start a home Bible study.

4 When revisiting someone who accepted a tract, you could say something like this: ▪ “The last time I saw you, you accepted a copy of this tract entitled Who Really Rules the World? Do you find it hard to accept that Satan rules this world? [Allow for response.] Notice the first paragraph on page 6.” Read the paragraph, then ask: “Why would Satan want to deceive us?” After the householder replies, consider together the fourth paragraph on page 3. You may continue with a thorough consideration of the tract, or you may want to introduce the brochure Does God Really Care About Us? and consider paragraph 8 on page 13.

5 There is good reason to be positive and to follow up on the interest we find in our preaching work even if it is expressed in a limited way. It is important to care about others, to be motivated to help them learn the truth. Jehovah’s organization provides literature and suggested presentations that can aid us in making others conscious of their spiritual need.—Matt. 5:3.

6 If you have had a pleasant conversation with someone who may be even slightly interested, do not neglect calling back to cultivate the interest. It may result in starting a home Bible study and putting someone on the way to life. We encourage all to continue sharing conscientiously in this lifesaving work.—1 Tim. 4:16.

34

*** km 1/05 p. 6 Try a Flexible Approach *** Try a Flexible Approach

Sincere interest in people will move us to try to discern their needs and show them how the Kingdom will provide the complete solution to the problems they face. (Phil. 2:4) A flexible approach that many publishers find effective is to invite the householder to comment on illustrations of Paradise scenes in our publications, such as those listed in the right-hand column of this page. You might do this using one of the following introductions:

▪ “Do you think we will ever see the human family enjoying the kind of conditions pictured here?” ▪ “All of us would like our children to be able to enjoy the kind of world pictured here. What do you

think it would take to bring this about?” ▪ “This is an illustration of what the earth will look like when God’s will takes place on earth as it is

in heaven. Do you notice anything that is different from life today?” ▪ “Would you like to live under the conditions pictured here? [Allow for response.] Do you think this

will happen in our lifetime?” Listen carefully to the person’s response, and kindly draw him out with an additional question or

two. If some respond that they would not want to live under the conditions pictured or that they do not believe that such a thing is possible, do not quickly conclude that they have no interest. Tactfully inquire why they feel the way they do. Their comments may reveal a deep concern over the seemingly unsolvable problems facing mankind.—Ezek. 9:4.

As you discern the householder’s concerns, adapt your presentation accordingly. Highlight the aspect of the Kingdom message that most directly addresses his needs. Share one or two scriptures that touch on the matter that concerns him. (See suggestions in the right-hand column.) Let him see for himself what God’s Word says. If he shows interest, offer the publication and arrange to call again. Continue to build on your initial conversation.

35

[Box on page 6] Examples of Paradise Scenes Creation book: pages 237, 243, 251 Teacher book: pages 251-4 Knowledge book: pages 4-5, 188-9 Require brochure: pages 11, 13 True Peace book: page 98 Worship God book: pages 92-3 [Box on page 6] Matters That Concern People Corruption, injustice

Isaiah 9:6, 7; 2 Peter 3:13

Crime, violence Psalm 37:10, 11; Proverbs 2:21, 22

Death, mourning Isaiah 25:8; Revelation 21:3, 4

Depression Psalm 34:8; Isaiah 65:17-19

Food shortages, malnutrition Psalm 72:16; Isaiah 25:6

Housing, economic problems Isaiah 65:21, 22

Ineffective government Psalm 146:3, 4; Daniel 2:44

Mistreatment of animals Proverbs 12:10

Moral breakdown 2 Timothy 3:1-5

Poverty, oppression Psalm 72:12-14; Ecclesiastes 8:9

Prejudice, inequality Isaiah 11:3-5; Acts 10:34, 35

Ruining of the earth Revelation 11:18

Sickness, disability Isaiah 33:24; 35:5, 6

War, terrorism Psalm 46:8, 9; Micah 4:3, 4

36

*** km 2/93 p. 4 Simple and Effective Presentations ***

Simple and Effective Presentations

1 Jesus proclaimed the Kingdom of God in a simple and straightforward manner. He knew that sheeplike ones would react favorably when they heard the truth. He also knew that people differ in their thinking, interests, and reasoning ability. Accordingly, he used a variety of uncomplicated introductions, questions, and illustrations in order to capture the attention of his listeners and to touch their hearts. We can imitate his example and make good use of simple and effective presentations.

2 Use the Reasoning Book Effectively: The first introduction under the heading “Employment/Housing” on page 11 of the Reasoning book is timely and easy to present. You might say: ▪ “We’ve been talking with your neighbors about what can be done to assure that there will be employment and housing for everyone. Do you believe that it is reasonable to expect that human governments will accomplish this? . . . But there is someone who knows how to solve these problems; that is mankind’s Creator.” Read Isaiah 65:21-23. Then you could ask the householder how that sounds to him.

3 The introduction under the heading “Injustice/Suffering” on page 12 will appeal to many today. You could ask: ▪ “Have you ever wondered: Does God really care about the injustice and suffering that humans experience?” Allow householder to answer and then read Ecclesiastes 4:1 and Psalm 72:12-14. If it is appropriate to feature the Live Forever book, turn to the pictures on pages 150-3 and briefly show how world conditions today are a fulfillment of Bible prophecy. Then turn to pages 161-2 to show what God has further foretold for man’s blessing. Ask the householder which aspect appeals to him most.

4 After a brief discussion with the householder, you may decide that it will be more appropriate to direct his attention to an article in one of the magazines, to a brochure, or to a tract than to the Live Forever book. For example, after using the introduction in paragraph 2 of this article, you might say:

37

▪ “This brochure, Does God Really Care About Us?, clearly explains what God has promised to do to care for our daily needs and shows how we can benefit.” Turn to pages 26 and 27 of the brochure, and call attention to paragraph 21.

5 Or after using the introduction in paragraph 3, the tract Will This World Survive? could be highlighted. You might say: ▪ “There is so much misery and trouble in the world today. This tract shows that war, food shortages, and health problems were all prophesied in the Bible. But God has also promised to bring about a marvelous change for mankind.” Read the last paragraph on page 5 of the tract.

6 Our sincere interest in people, coupled with a simple and effective presentation that touches the heart, will surely appeal to sheeplike ones.—John 10:16.

38

*** km 5/05 p. 8 Cultivate Interest With a Magazine Route *** Cultivate Interest With a Magazine Route

1 Many people whom we meet in the ministry welcome our visits and gladly accept our literature but hesitate to agree to a regular Bible study. One way to cultivate their interest is by means of a magazine route. When you place magazines, make a record of the person’s name and address, the date of the call, the issues that were accepted, and the scripture that was discussed, along with anything you noticed that might indicate the person’s interests. As each new issue of the magazines arrives, look for points that will appeal to those on your route, and feature them when you visit. (1 Cor. 9:19-23) In time, something they read in our journals may spark their interest and cause them to want to learn more.

2 We recognize, though, that most people will not become servants of Jehovah simply by reading the magazines on their own. Since it is urgent for people to seek Jehovah now, what more can we do to help them? (Zeph. 2:2, 3; Rev. 14:6, 7) We can cultivate their interest by sharing a carefully selected scripture each time we deliver the magazines.

3 One-Scripture Discussions: Think about those on your magazine route, and prepare a series of one-scripture discussions for each one’s specific needs. (Phil. 2:4) For example, if someone has recently lost a loved one in death, you might use a number of return visits to discuss what the Bible says about the condition of the dead and the hope of the resurrection. Material in the Reasoning book under the principal subjects “Death” and “Resurrection” could be used to prepare these one-scripture discussions. Additional discussions on related subjects, such as how sickness, old age, and death will be completely eliminated, might naturally follow. The key is to find a subject that interests the person and progressively show him what the Bible says about it.

4 Impart Understanding: Although it is usually best to keep such discussions simple and brief, more is needed than just reading the selected scripture. Satan has blinded people’s minds to the good news. (2 Cor. 4:3, 4) Even those who are familiar with the Bible need help to understand it. (Acts 8:30, 31) Hence, take time to explain and illustrate the text, much as you would in a talk in the Theocratic Ministry School. (Acts 17:3) Make sure the person sees the practical value of God’s Word in his own life.

5 If the person enjoys what he is learning, gradually extend the discussions to include two or three Bible texts each visit. Look for an opportunity to introduce the Require brochure or the Knowledge book. In this way, a magazine-route call may eventually become a Bible study.

[Study Questions]

1. How can we use a magazine route to cultivate interest?

2. Why is it urgent for people to seek Jehovah now, and what more can we do to help them?

3. (a) How can we prepare a series of one-scripture discussions? (b) What subjects are of greatest concern to people in your territory?

4. Why is it important to impart understanding when we use the Scriptures, and how can we do so?

5. How can a magazine-route call become a Bible study?

39

*** km 4/03 p. 8 Return Visits Lead to Bible Studies ***

Return Visits Lead to Bible Studies

1 Jesus commissioned his followers not only to preach but also to “make disciples . . . , teaching them.” (Matt. 28:19, 20) A preacher proclaims, but a teacher does more. He instructs, explains, and offers proof. One way we teach others is by making return visits on interested ones with a view to starting Bible studies with them.

2 On whom should you make return visits? Be sure to call back on all who accept literature or who show even a spark of interest in the good news. If you find interest when witnessing in a public setting, seek to obtain the person’s address or telephone number so that the interest can be cultivated. Be optimistic about starting Bible studies. Continue to search for those who will accept an offer to study the Bible, and you will likely find them.—Matt. 10:11.

3 Show Personal Interest: Preparation for an effective return visit begins on the initial call. Successful evangelizers take note of what interests the householder, and they use that as a basis for further discussions. Some find it advantageous to raise a question at the conclusion of the call in order to prime the householder for the next visit. Our sincere interest in people keeps us thinking about them even after we have left the door, and it prompts us to call again without delay. If possible, try to return while the interest is still fresh—perhaps even within a day or two.

4 When making a return visit, seek to build on your previous discussion. Make it your aim to share at least one upbuilding Scriptural point each time, and be willing to listen. Get to know the householder better. Then on subsequent visits, share the truths from God’s Word that most directly address his concerns.

5 Be Bible-Study Conscious: Make return visits with the objective of starting a Bible study. How can this be done? Mention that you would like to share an interesting point, and open to a paragraph in the Knowledge book or Require brochure that you think will appeal to the person. Read the paragraph, consider the question, and discuss one or two of the cited scriptures. This can be done right at the doorstep in five to ten minutes. Conclude by raising the next question and making arrangements to continue the discussion at another time.

6 Cultivating all interest we find is a vital aspect of our ministry. Therefore, set aside time in your weekly schedule for making return visits. Doing so will add to the effectiveness of your ministry and bring real joy.

[Study Questions] 1. Why is the return visit work so important?

2. On whom should we call back?

3, 4. What is involved in making effective return visits?

5. What simple approach could be used for starting Bible studies?

6. How can we show that we appreciate the importance of making return visits?

40

*** km 8/07 p. 3 How to Turn Magazine Placements Into Bible Studies ***

How to Turn Magazine Placements Into Bible Studies

1 On Saturdays we generally feature the Watchtower and Awake! magazines in the ministry. However, this is only the first step in reaching our goal of teaching honesthearted ones the truth. Below are some suggestions on how to place the Bible Teach book on a return visit and start a Bible study. These may be adapted to your territory and put in your own words. Feel free to use another approach if it is effective for you.

2 Use the Introductory Pages: When you return, you could say: “The magazines I left you direct attention to the Bible. Notice why Bible reading is so important.” Read Isaiah 48:17, 18; John 17:3; or another appropriate scripture. Then after introducing the Bible Teach book and handing the householder a copy, you could proceed as follows: ▪ “The Bible gives us a real hope for the future.” Show the householder pages 4-5 and ask, “Which of these promises would you like to see fulfilled?” Direct him to the chapter that discusses the Scriptural promise he selected, and briefly consider a paragraph or two if he allows. ▪ Or you could say, “The Bible answers the most important questions of life.” Direct his attention to page 6, and ask if he has ever wondered about any of the questions at the bottom of the page. Turn to the chapter that gives the answer, and briefly discuss a paragraph or two. ▪ Or you could point out some of the titles in the table of contents and ask which one of the subjects interests him. Turn to that chapter, and briefly demonstrate a Bible study.

3 Leave a Question on the Initial Visit: Another option is to lay the groundwork for the return visit on the initial call. After the householder accepts the magazines, raise a question, and promise to answer it on your next visit. Endeavor to make a definite arrangement to return, and be sure to keep the appointment. (Matt. 5:37) When you go back, remind the householder of the question, and briefly read and discuss the answer from the Bible Teach book. Hand him a copy so that he can follow along. Here are a few examples: ▪ If the magazine you placed deals with worsening world conditions, you could say, “Next time we can discuss the Bible’s answer to this question, What changes will God bring about on the earth?” Use pages 4-5 when you return. Or you could raise the question, “Are tragedies God’s will?” On the return visit, show the householder paragraphs 7-8 in chapter 1. ▪ If the magazine you placed deals with the family, before leaving you might raise this question, “What can each member of the family do to make family life happier?” When you return consider paragraph 4 in chapter 14.

41

▪ If the magazine you placed deals with the reliability of the Bible, you could raise this question for your next discussion, “Is the Bible scientifically accurate?” On the return visit, consider paragraph 8 in chapter 2.

4 At the end of each discussion, raise another question to be answered on the next visit. Once a regular study is established, consider the book systematically from beginning to end. What if the householder does not accept the Bible Teach book? You can still continue to take him the magazines and have Scriptural discussions with him. As you cultivate his interest, he may in time accept a Bible study.

5 The Watchtower and Awake! may stir up a person’s desire to learn what the Bible really teaches. Therefore, make a special effort to start Bible studies with those who accept the magazines. In this way, we will obey Jesus’ instructions to “make disciples . . . , teaching them.”—Matt. 28:19, 20. [Study Questions] 1. What is our goal when placing magazines? 2. How could we use the introductory pages in the Bible Teach book to start a Bible study? 3. How might we start a Bible study after placing magazines that deal with (a) worsening world

conditions? (b) the family? (c) the reliability of the Bible? 4. What should we do if the householder does not accept the Bible Teach book? 5. Why should we endeavor to do more than leave magazines with people?

42

*** km 4/06 p. 3 Conduct Progressive Doorstep and Telephone Bible Studies ***

Conduct Progressive Doorstep and Telephone Bible Studies

1 What a joy it is to start a Bible study! However, finding someone who has an interest in studying the Bible is only the beginning. The purpose of the study is to help the person to become a genuine disciple of Christ. (Matt. 28:19, 20) What can help us to attain that goal?

2 Busy People: People today are increasingly busy. In some places, few people may initially be willing to set aside a full hour to study the Bible. To help such ones, we have been encouraged to start and conduct Bible studies at the doorstep or over the telephone. At first, these studies may be relatively brief and may involve considering just a few Bible texts with the aid of one or two paragraphs in a publication, such as the Bible Teach book. How commendable it is that many publishers are now conducting such studies at the doorstep or over the telephone!

3 Should we be satisfied, though, to continue conducting a doorstep study indefinitely? No. Although we are wise not to overstay our welcome when a study is first started, the May 1990 Our Kingdom Ministry, page 8, commented: “Once the study is established and the householder’s interest has developed, a longer period of time may be spent on the study.” This is vital. To illustrate: A starving child might initially be fed small amounts of food until his appetite is restored, but we would hardly expect him to regain his full strength and grow normally if he were fed such small portions for months on end. Similarly, a Bible student needs a more formal and regular study in order to develop into a mature servant of God.—Heb. 5:13, 14.

4 Bible Studies Inside the Home: It is preferable to conduct a study in a private location—in a home or in some other suitable area. This will be more conducive to learning and will help the student to get the sense of God’s Word. (Matt. 13:23) It will also better enable the teacher to tailor the study material to the needs of the student. Moreover, having a longer study period will allow for a more thorough, faith-strengthening consideration of God’s Word.—Rom. 10:17.

5 How can you make the transition from a doorstep study to a study inside the home? After several brief studies, why not simply offer to study for a longer, specified period of time? Or you might use an indirect approach by asking the person, “Would you have time today to sit down and discuss this together?” or “How much time would you like to spend today discussing this subject?” If your efforts prove unsuccessful, by all means continue to have brief doorstep studies. At an appropriate time, try again to make the transition to inside the home.

6 As we continue to search for deserving ones, let us not lose sight of our purpose in starting and conducting Bible studies. Our aim is to help honesthearted ones become dedicated and baptized servants of Jehovah. May he bless our efforts as we carry out our ministry with this objective.—2 Tim. 4:5.

[Study Questions] 1. What is our purpose in conducting Bible studies?

2. What are doorstep and telephone Bible studies, and why are they effective?

3. Why should we endeavor to increase the period of time spent on a study at the door?

4. What are the benefits of holding a Bible study inside the home?

5. How can we make the transition from a doorstep study to a study inside the home?

6. With what objective should we carry out our ministry, and how can the suggestions in this article help us to achieve that objective?

43

*** km 12/07 p. 1 Make It Your Goal to Conduct a Bible Study ***

Make It Your Goal to Conduct a Bible Study

1 “Lift up your eyes and view the fields, that they are white for harvesting.” (John 4:35) Those words spoken by Jesus Christ are certainly applicable to the situation Christian ministers face today.

2 Honesthearted people desirous of being taught the ways of Jehovah are still being found. This is evident in the number of new disciples being baptized each year. If you are genuinely interested in conducting a Bible study, what might you do?

3 Set a Goal: First, set a goal to start and conduct a regular Bible study. Keep your goal in mind while engaging in the field ministry. Since our Christian commission involves teaching, along with preaching, all of us should seek to have an increased share in the Bible study work.—Matt. 24:14; 28:19, 20.

4 Other Points to Keep in Mind: Heartfelt prayer is a must for Kingdom publishers. At times we find people who have prayed for spiritual assistance. What a blessing it is to be used by Jehovah to find and teach such ones!—Hag. 2:7; Acts 10:1, 2.

5 A sister prayed for a Bible study and then displayed copies of the tract Would You Like to Know More About the Bible? at her place of work. When a woman picked up one of the tracts, read it through, and began to fill out the coupon, the sister spoke to her and was able to start a Bible study.

6 Fellow publishers who are effective in starting and conducting Bible studies can help you to reach your goal to conduct a Bible study. Prayerfully look for one, and take advantage of all the assistance available to reach this goal. Perhaps soon you will experience the joy of conducting a Bible study.

44

*** km 1/06 pp. 45 How to Offer the Bible Teach Book ***

How to Offer the Bible Teach Book

This insert includes a variety of suggestions for offering the Bible Teach book. To be most effective, put them in your own words, tailor your approach to the people in your territory, and become familiar with talking points in the book. Other presentations that are practical for your territory may also be used.—See the January 2005 Our Kingdom Ministry, p. 8.

Armageddon ▪ “When people hear the word ‘Armageddon,’ many think of mass destruction. Would it surprise you to learn that Armageddon is actually something to look forward to? [Allow for response. Then read Revelation 16:14, 16.] Notice this comment on what life will be like after Armageddon.” Turn to pages 82-4, and read paragraph 21.

Bible ▪ “People often refer to the Bible as God’s Word. Have you ever wondered how a book that was penned by men could rightly be called the Word of God? [Allow for response. Then read 2 Peter 1:21 and paragraph 5 on pages 19-20.] This publication gives the Bible’s answers to these questions.” Show the questions on page 6. ▪ “Nowadays, people have access to more information than ever before. But where do you think we can find sound counsel that can help us to lead happy, successful lives? [Allow for response. Then read 2 Timothy 3:16, 17 and paragraph 12 on page 23.] This publication explains how we can live in a way that pleases God and benefits us.” Show the chart and the picture on pages 122-3.

Death/Resurrection ▪ “Many people wonder what really happens at death. Do you think it is possible for us to know? [Allow for response. Then read Ecclesiastes 9:5 and paragraphs 5-6 on pages 58-9.] This book also explains what the Bible’s promise of a resurrection will mean for those who have died.” Show the picture on page 75. ▪ “When someone we love dies, it’s natural to want to see that person again. Wouldn’t you agree? [Allow for response.] Many have found comfort in the Bible’s promise of a resurrection. [Read John 5:28, 29 and paragraphs 16-17 on pages 71-2.] This chapter also answers these questions.” Show the introductory questions on page 66.

Everlasting Life

45

▪ “Most people desire good health and a long life. But if it was possible, would you want to live forever? [Allow for response. Then read Revelation 21:3, 4 and paragraph 17 on page 54.] This book discusses how we can gain everlasting life and what life will be like when that promise becomes a reality.”

Family ▪ “All of us are interested in having a happy family life. Wouldn’t you agree? [Allow for response.] The Bible speaks of something that everyone in the family can do to contribute to family happiness—imitate God in showing love.” Read Ephesians 5:1, 2 and paragraph 4 on page 135.

Housing ▪ “In many places, finding a decent place to live that is affordable has become more difficult. Do you think that one day there will be adequate housing for everyone? [Allow for response. Then read Isaiah 65:21, 22 and paragraph 20 on page 34.] This publication explains how this promise from God will be fulfilled.”

Jehovah God ▪ “Many people who believe in God would like to feel closer to him. Did you know that the Bible invites us to draw close to him? [Allow for response. Then read James 4:8a and paragraph 20 on page 16.] This publication has been prepared to help people to learn more about God, using their own copy of the Bible.” Show introductory questions on page 8. ▪ “Many people pray for God’s name to be sanctified, or hallowed. Have you ever wondered what that name is? [Allow for response. Then read Psalm 83:18 and paragraphs 2-3 on page 195.] This book explains what the Bible really teaches about Jehovah God and his purpose for mankind.”

Jesus Christ ▪ “People around the earth have heard of Jesus Christ. Some say he was no more than an outstanding man. Others worship him as God Almighty. Do you think it matters what we believe about Jesus Christ?” Allow for response. Then read John 17:3 and paragraph 3 on pages 37-8. Direct attention to the introductory questions below the chapter title.

Prayer ▪ “Have you ever wondered how God answers prayers? [Allow for response. Then read 1 John 5:14, 15 and paragraphs 16-18 on pages 170-2.] This chapter also explains why we should pray to God and what we must do to be heard by him.”

Religion

46

▪ “Many people are beginning to view the world’s religions as a cause of mankind’s problems rather than a solution. Do you think religion is leading people in the right direction? [Allow for response. Then read Matthew 7:13, 14 and paragraph 5 on pages 145-6.] This chapter examines six features that identify the worship that God approves.” Show list on page 147.

Tragedy/Suffering ▪ “When a tragedy occurs, many question whether God really cares about people and notices their suffering. Have you ever wondered about that? [Allow for response. Then read 1 Peter 5:7 and paragraph 11 on page 11.] This publication explains how God will completely eliminate mankind’s suffering.” Show introductory questions on page 106.

War/Peace ▪ “People everywhere long for peace. Do you think that the hope of peace on earth is just a dream? [Allow for response. Then read Psalm 46:8, 9.] This publication discusses how God will fulfill his purpose and bring about global peace.” Show the picture on page 35, and consider paragraphs 17-21 on pages 33-4.

Ways to Mention the Donation Arrangement “If you would like to make a small donation today toward our worldwide work, I will gladly accept it.” “Although our literature is offered without charge, we do accept modest donations for our worldwide work.” “You may wonder how we can afford to do this work. It is because our worldwide work is supported by voluntary donations. If you wish to make a small donation today, I will be pleased to accept it.”

47

*** km 1/06 p. 6 (1) Question, (2) Scripture, and (3) Chapter *** (Bible Teach)

(1) Question, (2) Scripture, and (3) Chapter

A simple way to present What Does the Bible Really Teach? is to (1) raise a viewpoint question, (2) read an appropriate scripture, and (3) feature a chapter in the book that discusses that subject by reading the introductory questions under the chapter title. If the householder shows interest, you may be able to demonstrate a Bible study using the opening paragraphs of that chapter. This approach can be used to start a study when making the initial call or a return visit. ▪ “Do you think it is possible for mere humans to come to know our almighty Creator, as stated here in the Bible?” Read Acts 17:26, 27, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 1. ▪ “With the challenges we face today, do you think it is possible to find the comfort and hope described here?” Read Romans 15:4, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 2. ▪ “If you had the power to do so, would you bring about these changes?” Read Revelation 21:4, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 3. ▪ “Do you think our children will ever be able to enjoy the conditions described in this ancient song?” Read Psalm 37:10, 11, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 3. ▪ “Do you think the day will ever come when these words are fulfilled?” Read Isaiah 33:24, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 3. ▪ “Have you ever wondered if the dead know what the living are doing?” Allow for response. Then read Ecclesiastes 9:5, and feature chapter 6. ▪ “Do you think it is possible that we will one day see our dead loved ones again, as Jesus stated in these verses?” Read John 5:28, 29, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 7. ▪ “What do you think it would take for God’s will to be done on earth as it is in heaven, as mentioned in this famous prayer?” Read Matthew 6:9, 10, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 8. ▪ “Do you think we are living in the time period that is described in this prophecy?” Read 2 Timothy 3:1-4, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 9. ▪ “Many people wonder why mankind’s problems seem to be getting worse. Have you ever considered this as a possibility?” Read Revelation 12:9, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 10. ▪ “Have you ever wanted to know the answer to a question like this?” Read Job 21:7, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 11.

48

▪ “Do you think that applying this advice from the Bible would help people to enjoy a happy family life?” Read Ephesians 5:33, and allow for response. Then feature chapter 14.

A Bible study may be reported when it has been conducted two times after the study arrangement was demonstrated and if there is reason to believe that the study will continue.

*** km 1/06 p. 3 How to Start Studies in the Bible Teach Book ***

How to Start Studies in the Bible Teach Book

Many of us would be delighted to conduct a Bible study if only we could get the study started. The new book What Does the Bible Really Teach? can help us. The preface on pages 3-7 is designed to get the householder into a Bible discussion using the publication. Even those with limited experience in the ministry will find it easy to use to start studies. ▪ You might try this approach using page 3:

After mentioning a news item or a problem that is on the minds of people in your territory, direct the householder’s attention to the questions in bold type on page 3, and invite him to comment. Then turn to pages 4-5. ▪ Or you might prefer to start by highlighting pages 4-5:

You could say, “Wouldn’t it be wonderful if the changes pictured here actually took place?” Or you might ask, “Which of these promises would you like to see fulfilled?” Listen carefully to the response.

If the householder shows a special interest in one of the scriptures, show him what the Bible teaches on that subject by considering the paragraphs in the book that discuss that text. (See box on this page of insert.) Consider the material just as you would on a Bible study. This can be done in five to ten minutes on the initial call right at the doorstep. ▪ Another approach is to draw the person out using page 6:

Direct the householder’s attention to the questions at the bottom of the page, and ask, “Have you ever wondered about any of these questions?” If he expresses interest in one of the questions, turn to the paragraphs in the book that answer the question. (See box on this page of insert.) As you consider the information together, you are conducting a Bible study. ▪ Page 7 may be used to lead into a demonstration of a Bible study:

49

Read the first three sentences on the page, and then turn to chapter 3 and demonstrate a study using paragraphs 1-3. Arrange to return to discuss the answers to the questions in paragraph 3. ▪ How to arrange to return:

When concluding the initial study, arrange to continue the discussion. You might simply say: “In just a few minutes, we learned what the Bible teaches on an important subject. Next time, we can discuss [leave a question that will be considered]. May I stop by at this same time next week?”

As we draw closer to Jehovah’s appointed time, he continues to equip us for the task at hand. (Matt. 28:19, 20; 2 Tim. 3:17) Let us make good use of this marvelous new tool to start Bible studies. [Box on page 3] Discussion of Scriptures on Pages 4-5 □ Revelation 21:4 (pp. 27-8, pars. 1-3) □ Isaiah 33:24; 35:5, 6 (p. 36, par. 22) □ John 5:28, 29 (pp. 72-3, pars. 17-19) □ Psalm 72:16 (p. 34, par. 19) Answers to Questions on Page 6 □ Why do we suffer? (pp. 108-9, pars. 6-8) □ How can we cope with life’s anxieties? (pp. 184-5, pars. 1-3) □ How can we make our family life happier? (p. 143, par. 20) □ What happens to us when we die? (pp. 58-9, pars. 5-6) □ Will we ever see our dead loved ones again? (pp. 72-3, pars. 17-19) □ How can we be sure that God will fulfill his promises for the future? (p. 25, par. 17)

50

*** km 1/05 pp. 35 Suggested Field Service Presentations *** (Various literature)

Use the following suggestions to help you prepare presentations that feature the literature offer for the month.

Draw Close to Jehovah “Many people who believe in God would like to feel closer to him. Did you know that God invites

us to draw close to him? [Read James 4:8.] This publication is designed to help people use their own Bible to draw close to God.” Read paragraph 1 on page 16.

“Today injustice abounds. It is just as described here. [Read Ecclesiastes 8:9b.] Many wonder if God even cares. [Read the first two sentences of paragraph 4 on page 119.] This chapter explains why God has permitted injustice for a time.”

Is There a Creator Who Cares About You? “Where can we find the best advice on how to solve our most perplexing problems? [Allow for

response. Then read Matthew 7:28, 29.] That describes how people responded to Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount. Note what others have said. [Feature comments on page 152.] This chapter discusses the life and teachings of Jesus.”

“Have you ever wondered: ‘If there is a God, will he ever act to remove suffering and injustice in the world?’ [Allow for response. Then read Revelation 21:3, 4.] This book explains what God will do to eliminate suffering and remove its source.” Show chapter 10.

Keep on the Watch! “Many people are concerned about the serious problems and shocking events that are common

today. [Cite an example known locally.] Did you know that such things are part of a global sign that shows that God’s government is soon to take control of earth’s affairs? [Allow for response. Then read an appropriate scripture text, such as Matthew 24:3, 7, 8; Luke 21:7, 10, 11; or 2 Timothy 3:1-5.] This brochure discusses why it is especially urgent to be alert to the significance of these events now.”

“Many today are distressed by shocking events or by severe personal loss. Some wonder why God does not intervene to prevent such things. The Bible assures us that God will soon act to relieve mankind’s suffering. [Read Revelation 14:6, 7.] Notice what God’s judgment will mean for mankind. [Read 2 Peter 3:10, 13.] This brochure provides more information on this important subject.”

51

Knowledge That Leads to Everlasting Life “If you were invited to live in beautiful surroundings like these, would you accept the invitation?

[Show the picture on pages 4-5, and allow for response.] Notice what God’s Word says is the key to enjoying this kind of life forever. [Read John 17:3.] This book will help you gain the knowledge that leads to everlasting life.” Arrange to discuss the first five paragraphs of chapter 1 on the next visit.

Open to the picture on pages 188-9, and using the words in the caption, ask the householder: “Do you hope to live in Paradise, when the knowledge of God fills the earth? [Allow for response. Then read Isaiah 11:9.] This book will help you to learn what the Bible says about Paradise and how we can be a part of it.” Arrange to discuss paragraphs 11-16 of chapter 1 on the next visit.

Learn From the Great Teacher “Do you think that the world would be a better place if people lived by this saying? [Read

Matthew 7:12a. Then allow for response.] This book contains many lessons from the greatest teacher who ever lived.” Highlight the pictures and captions in chapter 17.

“Most parents today try to instill wholesome values in their children. Do you feel that this is important? [Allow for response. Then read Proverbs 22:6.] Notice that parents are encouraged to start training their children from an early age. This book is designed to help them to do that.” Highlight the pictures and captions in chapter 15 or 18.

“Often parents are amazed at the questions their children ask. Some of those questions can be hard to answer, isn’t that so? [Allow for response. Then read Ephesians 6:4.] This book can help parents answer questions for their children today.” Highlight a few of the pictures and captions in chapters 11 and 12 or 34 to 36.

Life—How Did It Get Here? By Evolution or by Creation? “All of us are concerned with the crime and violence in our area. Do you feel that anyone has a

real solution to the problem? [Allow for response.] God has a solution.” Turn to page 196; read and comment on Proverbs 2:21, 22 in paragraph 19. Show the title of chapter 16, and offer the book.

Open to page 6, and say: “Many people think that our beautiful earth and life upon it resulted from an accident. What do you consider to be a reasonable explanation as to how all of this came about? [Allow for response.] Mountains of evidence confirm the Bible’s account of a Creator who is very powerful and who loves us very much. He is the true God, and his name is Jehovah.” Read Psalm 83:18, and briefly explain how it is his purpose to transform the entire earth into a paradise.

Mankind’s Search for God

52

“With so many different religions today, have you ever wondered how we can determine which one is approved by God?” After a response, open to page 377. Highlight point number 7, and ask if the householder agrees that the true religion should unite all races of mankind. Look up one of the cited scriptures, and as time permits, discuss some of the other points on the list. If there is genuine interest, offer the book. When leaving, you could ask, “How should true religion affect a person’s conduct?” Arrange for a return visit to answer the question.

If a person identifies himself as a member of a major religious group, you might say: “It is interesting to meet people of various religions. Mankind’s search for God has taken many different directions. [If appropriate, read Acts 17:26, 27.] Often, people follow the religion of their parents. [Read paragraph 12 on page 8.] Learning more about other religions is enlightening and educational. This book explains the origin, practices, and teachings of the major religions of the world.” Show an example of what the book contains about the person’s religion, as found on the following pages: Sikhism (100-101); Hinduism (116-17); Buddhism (141); Taoism (164-6); Confucianism (177); Shintoism (190-5); Judaism (220-1); and Islam (289).

Revelation—Its Grand Climax At Hand!

“You may have heard about [mention a news item]. When lives are tragically cut short, many wonder what comfort can be offered to the families of the victims. What do you think?” Allow for response. Then open to page 299, and show the resurrection scene that is illustrated. Continue by saying: “Many are surprised to learn that both righteous and unrighteous people will be brought back to life in Paradise on earth. [Read Acts 24:15 as quoted in paragraph 9 on page 297, and then give the explanation found in paragraph 10.] This book discusses many other interesting details about God’s purpose for the future.”

The Bible—God’s Word or Man’s?

“We live at a time when almost everyone is faced with serious problems. Many turn to all sorts of counselors for guidance. Some look to psychics for help. Where do you think we can find sound counsel that will really work for us? [Allow for response.] The Bible states an important fact that all of us need to appreciate. [Read 2 Timothy 3:16. Then open to page 187, and read paragraph 9.] This book will help you to appreciate how following what the Bible says always works out for the best.”

The Greatest Man Who Ever Lived

53

“During this season many people are thinking about Jesus. However, because so many bad things are happening all over the world, some may wonder if Jesus really cares about us. How do you feel about that?” Allow for a reply. Turn to chapter 24, and discuss briefly why Jesus came to earth. Then read John 15:13, emphasizing Jesus’ heartfelt love for others.

“When someone mentions Jesus Christ, many people think of him either as a baby or as a suffering man about to die. Their concept of Jesus involves only his birth and his death. The marvelous things he said and did during his lifetime often go unnoticed. What he accomplished affects every person who has ever lived on this earth. That’s why it’s vital that we learn as much as we can about the wonderful things he did in our behalf.” Read John 17:3. Turn to the first page of the introduction, and read the fourth paragraph.

What Does God Require of Us? “Do you think that God meant for us to live surrounded by troubles such as those we are faced

with today? [Allow for response. Then read Matthew 6:10.] Have you given thought to just what the Kingdom of God really is?” Turn to lesson 6, and read the questions that are posed at the beginning of the lesson. Begin a discussion of the lesson, or arrange to do so on the next visit.

“Despite the advances of modern society, sickness and death continue to cause much suffering and sorrow for mankind. Do you know what Jesus will do for the sick, the elderly, and even the dead?” Allow for response. If the person wants to know the answer, open to lesson 5, and read the questions for paragraphs 5-6. Discuss the paragraphs, or arrange to do so on the next visit.

Worship the Only True God “Where do you think we can turn for help to deal with the pressures of life? [Allow for response.

Then read Romans 15:4.] Notice that the inspired Scriptures provide us with instruction, comfort, and hope, which can strengthen us to endure difficulties. This book offers helpful suggestions on how we can get the most benefit from reading the Bible.” Highlight the four points outlined on page 30.

“Since the days when Jesus walked the earth, many people have been praying for God’s Kingdom to come. Have you ever wondered what the coming of that Kingdom will mean for mankind? [Allow for response. Then read Daniel 2:44.] This book explains what God’s Kingdom is, what it will accomplish, and how we can benefit from its righteous rule.” Feature the illustration on pages 92-3.

54

*** km 1/02 pp. 36 Suggested Field Service Presentations *** (Various literature)

How to Use This Insert Most of the following presentations appeared in past issues of Our Kingdom Ministry. Try as

many as you wish in your witnessing activity, and see what results you obtain. Save this insert, and refer to it when preparing for the ministry.

You may arouse a person’s interest in God’s Word if you get to the point quickly. Raise a specific question, then read the brief Scriptural answer. You might try these suggestions:

“As you contemplate the future, do you feel hopeful or doubtful? [Allow for response.] The Bible predicted the unsettling events we see today and their outcome.”—2 Tim. 3:1, 2, 5; Prov. 2:21, 22.

“There is much concern today about health care. Did you know that God promises that he will permanently solve all health problems?”—Isa. 33:24; Rev. 21:3, 4.

“Did you know that the Bible foretells that eventually there will be only one government ruling the whole world?”—Dan. 2:44; Matt. 6:9, 10.

“What do you think conditions would be like if Jesus Christ ruled the earth?”—Ps. 72:7, 8.

“Many people suffer discrimination because of their gender, religion, or race. How do you think God feels about such prejudice?”—Acts 10:34, 35.

“We know that Jesus Christ performed many miracles in his day. If you could ask him to perform one more miracle, what would it be?”—Ps. 72:12-14, 16.

“Most people are tired of hearing about problems. They want to hear about solutions. But where can we find real solutions to our problems?”—2 Tim. 3:16, 17.

“Can you identify the Kingdom that you pray for in the Lord’s (or, Our Father) Prayer?”—Rev. 11:15.

Conversation Starters

The list of questions below, compiled from topics in the Reasoning book, shows the page number in the book where each answer is found:

Why do we grow old and die? (98)

What is the condition of the dead? (100)

Are there sound reasons for believing in God? (145)

Does God really care what happens to us humans? (147)

Is God a real person? (147)

55

Do all good people go to heaven? (162)

Must a person go to heaven to have a truly happy future? (163)

Why is it important to know and use God’s personal name? (196)

Is Jesus Christ actually God? (212)

What will God’s Kingdom accomplish? (227)

What is the purpose of human life? (243)

What can help to improve a marriage? (253)

Are all religions acceptable to God? (322)

How can a person know which religion is right? (328)

How powerful a figure is Satan in today’s world? (364)

Why does God permit suffering? (393)

Why is there so much wickedness? (427)

Who rules this world—God or Satan? (436)

Suggestions for Presenting the Require Brochure

“No doubt you would agree that many people believe in God. All who do believe in him agree that God requires something from us. What people cannot agree on is, What does God require of us?” Then present the Require brochure, turn to lesson 1, and discuss it.

“With so many problems in family life today, have you ever wondered what is the secret for achieving family happiness?” After a response, explain that in the Bible, God reveals the real secret of family happiness. Read Isaiah 48:17. Then turn to lesson 8 in the Require brochure, and point to some of the cited Bible verses that provide reliable guidance for each member of the family. Read the list of questions at the beginning of the lesson. Ask if the person would like to read the answers.

“This brochure contains a well-rounded-out study course covering the basic teachings of the Bible. On each page, you will find answers to questions that have troubled people for centuries. For example, What is God’s purpose for the earth?” Turn to lesson 5, and read the questions at the start of the lesson. Ask the householder which one interests him the most, and then read the corresponding paragraph(s), looking up appropriate scriptures. Explain that satisfying answers to the other questions can be found just as easily as this one. Suggest that you return again to discuss another question.

“What do you think is the reason for all the violence in public schools? Does it result from a lack of parental training? Or could it be something else, such as the influence of the Devil?” Allow for a response. If the person says that it is because of the Devil’s influence, read Revelation 12:9, 12. Point out the Devil’s

56

role in promoting turmoil in the world. Then open the Require brochure to lesson 4, and ask if the person ever wondered where the Devil came from. Proceed to read and discuss the first two paragraphs. If the person chooses “a lack of parental training” as the reason for violence in the schools, read 2 Timothy 3:1-3 and point out the traits that evidently contribute to this problem. Then open the Require brochure to lesson 8, read paragraph 5, and continue the discussion.

“Do you think it is reasonable to expect that the Creator would give us the knowledge we need to build a successful family life?” After a response, introduce the Require brochure. Turn to lesson 8, and explain that it contains principles from the Bible for every member of the family. Offer to demonstrate how to use the brochure with the Bible to get the greatest benefit.

“With all the challenges we face in modern-day life, do you feel that prayer can be of real help to us? [Allow for response.] Many say that prayer gives them inner strength. [Read Philippians 4:6, 7.] Even so, a person may feel that his prayers go unanswered. [Open the Require brochure to lesson 7.] This brochure explains how prayer can be of the most benefit to us.”

“We have been talking to our neighbors about why there are so many different religions in the world. Yet, there is only one Bible. In your opinion, why does this confusion of religions exist? [Allow for response. Open the Require brochure to lesson 13, and read the opening questions.] You will receive satisfying answers to those questions by reading this lesson.”

After placing the Watchtower and Awake! magazines with a person, ask if you might read to him one short paragraph. If allowed to do so, open the Require brochure to lesson 5. Point out the questions listed at the start of the lesson, and ask him to listen for the answer to the first question as you read the opening paragraph. After reading the paragraph, ask the question and get his response. Offer the brochure, and if it is accepted, arrange to return to get his responses to the next two questions in the list.

Suggestions for Presenting the Knowledge Book

With the Bible in hand, begin by saying: “We are sharing a scripture with everyone on your street today. It states . . .” Read John 17:3, and then ask: “Did you notice what is promised if we have the right kind of knowledge? [Allow for response.] Where would a person find such knowledge?” After a response, show the Knowledge book, and say: “This book points to the knowledge that leads to everlasting life. It does so by answering the most common questions that people have about the Bible.” Show the table of contents, and ask the person if he has ever wondered about any of those subjects.

“Have you ever wondered if God is really concerned about the injustice and suffering that we see around us or even experience ourselves? [Allow for response.] The Bible assures us that God loves us and that he will help us through times of distress.” Read portions of Psalm 72:12-17. Open the Knowledge book to chapter 8, and point out that it gives a comforting answer to a question that millions have asked, Why does God permit suffering? If possible, discuss some of the Scriptural thoughts covered in paragraphs 3 to 5, or do so on the return visit.

57

“Most of us have lost loved ones in death. Have you ever wondered whether we will see them again? [Allow for response.] Jesus proved that our loved ones can be rescued from death. [Read John 11:11, 25, 44.] Even though this took place centuries ago, it demonstrates what God has promised to do for us.” Open the Knowledge book to the picture on page 85, and read the caption. Then show the picture on page 86, and comment on it. Lay the groundwork for the next visit by asking: “Would you like to know the reason why humans grow old and die?” Return to discuss chapter 6.

“Have you ever thought about why humans yearn for a longer life?” After a response, open the Knowledge book to chapter 6, and read paragraph 3. Reason on the cited scriptures. Referring to the two questions at the end of the paragraph, ask the person if he would like to see the answers for himself. If the response is favorable, discuss the next few paragraphs.

“We are asking people if they believe this . . .” Read Genesis 1:1, and then ask: “Do you agree with that statement?” If the person agrees, then say: “I do too. However, do you think that if God created all things, he is also responsible for wickedness?” After acknowledging the person’s response, read Ecclesiastes 7:29. Open the Knowledge book to chapter 8, and read paragraph 2. If he does not agree with Genesis 1:1, urge him to examine the evidence that the Creator exists.—See Reasoning book, pages 84-6.

“Would you agree that with today’s moral values changing so rapidly, we need a reliable guide in life? [Allow for response.] Although it is the oldest of books, the Bible gives practical counsel for modern living and happy family life.” Then turn to chapter 2 in the Knowledge book, and read paragraph 10 and the first sentence of paragraph 11, including 2 Timothy 3:16, 17.

“Would you like to know what the future holds for us and for the earth? [Allow for response.] The Bible sums up the future in one word—Paradise! That is where God put the first human couple when he created them. Notice this description of what it must have been like.” Open the Knowledge book to page 8, and read paragraph 9, under the subheading “Life in Paradise.” Then discuss the points in paragraph 10, and read the cited scripture, Isaiah 55:10, 11. Offer to continue the discussion of what life in the restored Paradise will be like, covering paragraphs 11-16.

When making return visits on those with whom you placed the Watchtower and Awake! magazines, you might say this:

“The last time I called, I was pleased to leave with you a copy of the Watchtower magazine. Perhaps you noticed that the full title of the journal is The Watchtower Announcing Jehovah’s Kingdom. Today I would like to explain what this Kingdom is and what it can mean for you and your family.” Then open the Require brochure to lesson 6, and read and discuss as much as the person has time for.

“I visited you recently and left copies of the Watchtower and Awake! magazines. These journals build respect for the Bible and its moral guidance. Because I feel it is essential for everyone to understand God’s Word, I came back to show you something that will help you to do that.” Introduce the Require brochure or the Knowledge book, and offer a Bible study.

When featuring any of the older 192-page books, you might try this presentation:

58

“Much emphasis has been placed on the need for quality education. In your opinion, what kind of education should a person pursue to ensure the greatest happiness and success in life? [Allow for response. Then read Proverbs 9:10, 11.] This handbook [give the title of the book you are offering] is based on the Bible. It points to the only source of knowledge that can lead to everlasting life.” Show a specific example in the book, and encourage the person to read it.

Other Publications

Suggested presentations for additional books and brochures can be found in the Watch Tower Publications Index under:

Presentations List by Publication

The Direct Approach

To start a Bible study, try using one of these direct approaches:

“Did you know that in just a few minutes, you can find the answer to an important Bible question? For example, . . .” Then, pose a question that appears at the beginning of one of the lessons in the Require brochure and that you think would appeal to the individual.

“I stopped by to show you our free Bible study program. It takes about five minutes to demonstrate. Do you have five minutes?” If the answer is yes, use lesson 1 in the Require brochure to demonstrate the study, reading only one or two selected scriptures. Afterward, ask: “When would you have about 15 minutes so that we can cover the next lesson?”

“Many people have a Bible, but they do not realize that it holds the answers to the important questions we all have about our future. Using this study aid [the Require brochure or the Knowledge book] for an hour or so a week, you can gain a basic understanding of the Bible in just a few months. I would be happy to show you how the program works.”

“I’m calling to offer you a free home Bible course. If I may, I’d like to take just a few minutes to demonstrate how people in some 200 lands discuss the Bible at home as family groups. We can use any of these topics as a basis for discussion. [Show the table of contents in the Knowledge book.] Which one especially interests you?” Wait for the person to make a selection. Turn to the chapter that is chosen, and start the study in the first paragraph.

“I give Bible lessons free of charge and have openings in my schedule for additional students. This Bible study aid is what we use. [Show the Knowledge book.] The course lasts only a few months and provides answers to such questions as: Why does God permit suffering? Why do we grow old and die? What happens to our dead loved ones? And how can we draw close to God? May I demonstrate a lesson?”

If you have found an effective presentation that gets results in cultivating interest, by all means continue to use it! Simply adapt it to the literature offer for the current month.

59

*** km 1/03 p. 3 Presentations for Draw Close to Jehovah ***

Presentations for Draw Close to Jehovah

▪ With Bible in hand, say: “Many people who believe in God would like to feel closer to him. Did you know that God invites us to draw close to him? [Read James 4:8.] This publication is designed to help people use their own Bible to draw close to God.” Read paragraph 1 on page 16. ▪ With Bible in hand, say: “Today injustice abounds. It is just as described here. [Read Ecclesiastes 8:9b.] Many wonder if God even cares. [Read the first two sentences of paragraph 4 on page 119.] This chapter explains why God has permitted injustice for a time.”

60

*** km 9/05 pp. 36 Conducting Progressive Bible Studies ***

Save

Conducting Progressive Bible Studies

This insert is a compilation of key points from the series of articles on conducting progressive Bible studies that has appeared in Our Kingdom Ministry. All are encouraged to save this insert and to consult it when conducting Bible studies. In addition, points from this insert may be highlighted during meetings for field service, and service overseers may use it as the basis for talks they present when visiting book study groups.

Part 1: What Is a Bible Study?

If you regularly and systematically have Bible discussions, though brief, using the Bible or along with it one of the recommended publications, you are conducting a Bible study. The study may be reported when it has been conducted two times after the study arrangement is demonstrated and if there is reason to believe that the study will continue.—km 7/04 p. 1. Recommended Publications ▪ What Does God Require of Us? ▪ Knowledge That Leads to Everlasting Life ▪ Worship the Only True God ▪ You Can Be God’s Friend! may be used to study with people who have limited education or

reading ability.

Part 2: Preparing to Conduct the Study

We need to present the information in a way that touches the student’s heart. This requires thorough preparation with the student in mind.—km 8/04 p. 1.

How to Prepare ▪ Examine the title, subheadings, and visual aids of the chapter or lesson. ▪ Identify the answers to the printed questions, marking only key words and phrases.

61

▪ Decide which cited scriptures to read during the study. Make brief notes in the margin of the study publication.

▪ Prepare a brief review of main points. Personalize the Lesson

▪ Pray about the student and his needs. ▪ Anticipate points that the student may have difficulty understanding or accepting. ▪ Consider: What does he need to understand or work on in order to make spiritual progress? How

can I reach his heart? ▪ As needed, prepare an illustration, an explanation, or a series of questions to help the student

grasp a point or a scripture.

Part 3: Effective Use of the Scriptures

Our purpose in conducting Bible studies is to “make disciples” by helping people to understand and accept the teachings of God’s Word and apply them in their lives. (Matt. 28:19, 20; 1 Thess. 2:13) Therefore, the study should center on the Scriptures.—km 11/04 p. 4.

Teach From God’s Word ▪ Show the student how to find specific texts in his own copy of the Bible. ▪ Look up and discuss Bible texts that show the Scriptural basis for our beliefs. ▪ Use questions. Instead of explaining Bible texts to the student, have him explain them to you. ▪ Keep it simple. Do not try to explain every aspect of a scripture. Include only what is needed to

make the point clear. ▪ Make practical application. Help the student to see how Bible texts apply to him personally.

Part 4: Training Students to Prepare

A student who reads the lesson beforehand, marks the answers, and thinks of how to express them in his own words makes rapid spiritual progress. Therefore, once a regular study has been established, prepare a lesson together to show the student how. With most students, it will be helpful to prepare an entire chapter or lesson together.—km 12/04 p. 1.

Markings and Notations

62

▪ Explain how to find direct answers to the printed questions. ▪ Show the student your copy of the study publication in which you have marked only the key

words or phrases. ▪ Help the student to see that each cited text supports a point in the paragraph, and show him how

to make brief notations in the margin of his study publication. Survey and Review

▪ Show the student how to examine the chapter or lesson title, subheadings, and illustrations before beginning his detailed preparation.

▪ Encourage the student to review the main points at the conclusion of the preparation session.

Part 5: Determining How Much Material to Cover

The amount of material that can be considered will depend on the ability and the circumstances of both the teacher and the student.—km 1/05 p. 1.

Build Solid Faith ▪ Do not sacrifice the student’s having a clear understanding of God’s Word for the sake of speed. ▪ Spend whatever time is necessary to help the student understand and accept what he is

learning. ▪ Allow sufficient time to consider key scriptures that provide the basis for the teachings.

Keep the Study Moving ▪ If the student is inclined to speak at length about personal matters, you may need to arrange to

discuss these after the study. ▪ Do not talk excessively during the study. Limit the discussion of side points and experiences so

as not to hinder the student from acquiring an accurate knowledge of basic Bible teachings.

Part 6: When a Student Raises a Question

Once a Bible study is well-established, it is usually best to consider Bible teachings in an orderly manner rather than jump from subject to subject. This helps the student to build a foundation of accurate knowledge and to progress spiritually.—km 2/05 p. 6.

Be Discerning

63

▪ Questions related to the study material can usually be answered on the spot. ▪ Questions unrelated to the study material or that require research can be considered at another

time. It may be helpful to write down such questions. ▪ If the student has difficulty accepting a certain teaching, consider additional material that

thoroughly discusses the subject. ▪ If the student is still not convinced, leave the subject for another time and continue with the

study. Be Modest

▪ If you do not know the answer to a question, do not venture an opinion. ▪ Progressively teach the student how to do research.

Part 7: Offering Prayer at the Study

In order for Bible students to make spiritual progress, Jehovah’s blessing is essential. Therefore, it is proper to open and close an established study with prayer.—km 3/05 p. 4.

How to Introduce Prayer ▪ With those who are religiously inclined, prayer can often be offered from the very first study. ▪ With others, we need to discern the appropriate time to introduce prayer. ▪ Psalm 25:4, 5 and 1 John 5:14 can be used to explain why prayer is offered. ▪ John 15:16 can be used to show that we should pray to Jehovah through Jesus Christ.

What to Include in Prayers ▪ It is fitting to praise Jehovah as the Source of instruction. ▪ Express sincere interest in the student. ▪ Express appreciation for the organization that Jehovah is using. ▪ Request Jehovah’s blessing on the student’s efforts to apply what he is learning.

64

Part 8: Directing Students to the Organization

Our goal in conducting Bible studies is not only to teach doctrinal information but also to help students become part of the Christian congregation. Take a few minutes each week on the study to share a point about Jehovah’s organization.—km 4/05 p. 8.

Congregation Meetings ▪ Describe each congregation meeting. From the first study, invite them to attend. ▪ Share outstanding points that were presented at the meetings. ▪ Build enthusiasm for the Memorial, assemblies, and the visit of the circuit overseer. ▪ Use photographs in our publications to help them visualize what takes place. ▪ Encourage them to read the brochure Jehovah’s Witnesses—Who Are They? What Do They

Believe? Use Videos to Build Appreciation

▪ Jehovah’s Witnesses—The Organization Behind the Name ▪ Our Whole Association of Brothers ▪ United by Divine Teaching ▪ To the Ends of the Earth

Part 9: Preparing Students to Witness Informally

As Bible students begin to exercise faith in what they are learning, they are impelled to speak about it.—km 5/05 p. 1.

Encourage Them to Witness ▪ Are there friends and family members whom they could invite to sit in on the study? ▪ Have any of their workmates, schoolmates, or other acquaintances expressed interest?

Train Them to Share Their Beliefs ▪ At selected points during the study, ask the student, “How would you use the Bible to explain this

truth to your family?”

65

▪ Help the student appreciate the need to be respectful and kind when speaking with others about God and his purposes.

▪ The brochure Jehovah’s Witnesses—Who Are They? What Do They Believe? can be used by students to help friends and family members understand our Bible-based beliefs and activities.

Part 10: Training Students in the HousetoHouse Ministry

When the elders determine that a Bible student qualifies as an unbaptized publisher, he may begin to share with the congregation in the public preaching work.—km 6/05 p. 1.

Preparing Together ▪ Show the new publisher where he can find suggested presentations. ▪ Help him select a simple approach that is practical for the local territory. ▪ Encourage him to feature the Bible in his ministry. ▪ Rehearse together. Show him how to handle common responses tactfully.

Preaching Together ▪ Let the student observe as you give the presentation that you prepared together. ▪ Take into consideration the personality and abilities of the student. In some cases, it may be best

to have him give only part of the presentation. ▪ Help the new publisher establish a regular schedule for participating in the ministry.

Part 11: Helping Students to Make Return Visits

Preparation for a return visit begins with the initial call. Encourage the student to take a sincere interest in those with whom he speaks. Progressively train him to draw them out, to listen to their comments, and to note the things that concern them.—km 7/05 p. 1.

Preparing to Return ▪ Review the initial call, and help the student select a subject that will appeal to the householder. ▪ Prepare a brief presentation that features one Bible text along with one paragraph in a

publication.

66

▪ Prepare a question that can be raised at the conclusion of the discussion. Follow Up Interest Diligently

▪ Encourage the student to return promptly on all who show interest. ▪ Help the student see the need to persist in trying to reach those who are hard to find. ▪ Show the new publisher how to make appointments, and help him appreciate the need to return

as promised.

Part 12: Helping Students Start and Conduct Bible Studies

Your imitating Jesus by setting a proper example in your own ministry is vital. As your student observes your lead in the ministry, he will appreciate that the objective in making return visits is to start Bible studies.—km 8/05 p. 1.

Offering a Bible Study ▪ Explain to the student that it is not generally necessary to describe the study arrangement in

detail. ▪ Often it is best simply to demonstrate the study using one or perhaps two paragraphs from a

study publication. ▪ Review and rehearse one of the suggestions for starting Bible studies.—km 8/05 p. 8; km 1/02

p. 6. Training Students to Be Teachers

▪ Encourage students to enroll in the Theocratic Ministry School. ▪ Arrange for new publishers to go on other Bible studies in which they might have a small share in

teaching.

67

*** km 7/04 p. 1 Part 1—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies ***

Part 1—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies

What Is a Bible Study?

1 Worldwide, about six million Bible studies are being conducted by God’s people each month. By using good teaching methods, we can help these Bible students progress to the point of dedication and baptism and become “adequately qualified to teach others.” (2 Tim. 2:2) Would you like to help your student to make such progress? Starting with this issue, Our Kingdom Ministry will feature a series of articles that will explain basic aspects of conducting progressive Bible studies.

2 When to Report a Bible Study: If you regularly and systematically have Bible discussions, though brief, using the Bible along with one of the recommended publications, you are conducting a Bible study. This is true even if the study takes place on the doorstep or over the telephone. The study may be reported when it has been conducted two times after the study arrangement is demonstrated and if there is reason to believe that the study will continue.

3 The Require brochure and the Knowledge book are publications used for conducting many Bible studies. After they have been completed, if it is evident that a person is making progress, even slowly, and that he is developing appreciation for what he is learning, then the study may be continued in the Worship God book. The brochure You Can Be God’s Friend! may be used to study with people who have limited education or reading ability.

4 The Bible study work has been effective in assisting millions to become true disciples of Jesus Christ. (Matt. 28:19, 20) By applying the suggestions offered in upcoming articles of this series, you can conduct a progressive Bible study.

68


Part 2—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Preparing to Conduct the Study

1 Teaching effectively on a Bible study involves more than just discussing the material and looking up the cited scriptures. We need to present the information in a way that touches the student’s heart. This requires thorough preparation with the student in mind.—Prov. 15:28.

2 How to Prepare: Begin by praying to Jehovah about the person and his needs. Ask Jehovah to help you reach the student’s heart. (Col. 1:9, 10) To get the theme clearly in mind, take a moment to consider the title of the chapter or lesson, the subheadings, and any visual aids. Ask yourself, ‘What is the thrust of the material?’ This will help you to focus on the main points as you conduct the study.

3 Carefully review the material paragraph by paragraph. Identify the answers to the printed questions, marking only the key words and phrases. Analyze how the cited scriptures relate to the main point of the paragraph, and decide which ones to read during the study. You may find it helpful to make brief notes in the margin of the publication. The student should clearly see that what he is learning is from God’s Word.—1 Thess. 2:13.

4 Personalize the Lesson: Next, consider the lesson with the particular student in mind. Try to anticipate his questions and the points that he may have difficulty understanding or accepting. Ask yourself: ‘What does he need to understand or work on in order to make spiritual progress? How can I reach his heart?’ Then adapt your teaching accordingly. At times, you may see a need to prepare an illustration, an explanation, or a series of questions to help the student grasp the meaning of a certain point or scripture. (Neh. 8:8) But avoid inserting additional information that contributes little to the theme. A brief review at the end of the study will help him to retain the main points.

5 What joy we have when new ones bear righteous fruit to Jehovah’s praise! (Phil. 1:11) To help them reach that goal, prepare well each time you conduct a Bible study.

69


Part 3—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Effective Use of the Scriptures

1 Our purpose in conducting Bible studies is to “make disciples” by helping people to understand and accept the teachings of God’s Word and apply them in their lives. (Matt. 28:19, 20; 1 Thess. 2:13) Therefore, the study should center on the Scriptures. At first, it may be helpful to show students how to find specific texts in their own copy of the Bible. How, though, can we use the Scriptures to help such ones to progress spiritually?

2 Select Texts to Read: In your preparation, determine how each cited scripture in the lesson applies to the point under consideration, and decide which ones you will look up and discuss during the study. Generally, it is good to read those that show the Scriptural basis for our beliefs. Texts that provide background information may not need to be read. Take into consideration the needs and circumstances of each student.

3 Use Questions: Instead of explaining Bible texts to the student, have him explain them to you. You can prompt him to do this by the skillful use of questions. If the application of a scripture is obvious, you might simply ask how the text supports what is stated in the paragraph. In other cases, a more specific question or series of questions may be needed to direct the student to the proper conclusion. If further explanations are needed, these can be made after the student has responded.

4 Keep It Simple: A skilled archer often needs just one arrow to hit a target. Similarly, a skilled teacher does not require many words to make a point. He can convey information simply, clearly, and accurately. At times, you may need to do research in Christian publications to understand a scripture and explain it correctly. (2 Tim. 2:15) But avoid trying to explain every aspect of each scripture in the study. Include only what is needed to make the point under consideration.

5 Make Practical Application: When appropriate, help the student to see how Bible texts apply to him personally. For example, when considering Hebrews 10:24, 25 with a student who is not yet attending Christian meetings, you might discuss one of the meetings and invite him to attend it. But avoid pressuring him. Allow God’s Word to motivate him to take the action needed to please Jehovah.—Heb. 4:12.

6 As we carry out the commission to make disciples, may we “promote obedience by faith” through our effective use of the Scriptures.—Rom. 16:26.

1. Why should we emphasize the Scriptures when conducting Bible studies?

2. How do we decide which Bible texts to read and discuss?

3. What is the benefit of using questions, and how can we do this?

4. How much explanation is needed for the scriptures we read?

5, 6. How can we help students to apply God’s Word in their life, but what should we avoid?

70


Part 4—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Training Students to Prepare

1 A student who reads the lesson beforehand, marks the answers, and thinks of how to express them in his own words should make rapid spiritual progress. Therefore, once a regular study has been established, prepare a lesson together to show the student how. With most students, it will be helpful to prepare an entire chapter or lesson together.

2 Markings and Notations: Explain how to find direct answers to the printed questions. Show the student your copy of the study publication in which you have marked only the key words or phrases. As you consider the material, he may want to follow your example, marking in his copy only what is needed to help him recall the answer. (Luke 6:40) Then ask him to give the answer in his own words. This will allow you to see how well he understands the material.

3 A careful examination of unquoted scriptures is an important part of the student’s preparation for the study. (Acts 17:11) Help him to see that each cited text supports a point in the paragraph. Show him how to make brief notations in the margin of his study publication. Keep before him the fact that the Bible is the basis for what he is learning. Encourage him to make generous use of the cited scriptures in his comments during the study.

4 Survey and Review: Before the student begins his detailed preparation of the study material, it will be helpful for him to get an overview of the subject. Point out that he can survey the material by briefly examining the chapter title, subheadings, and illustrations. Explain that before concluding his session of preparation, he would be wise to take a moment to review the main points presented in the lesson, perhaps using the review box if one is provided. Such repetition will help him retain the information.

5 Training the student to prepare well for his study will help him to make meaningful comments at congregation meetings. It will also help him to develop study habits that will benefit him long after his personal Bible study is completed.

71


Part 5—Conducting Progressive Bible StudiesDetermining How Much Material to Cover

1 When teaching, Jesus took into consideration his disciples’ limitations, speaking to them “as far as they were able to listen.” (Mark 4:33; John 16:12) In a similar way, teachers of God’s Word today need to gauge the pace at which they cover material on a Bible study. The amount of material that can be considered will depend on the ability and the circumstances of both the teacher and the student.

2 Build Solid Faith: Some students may require two or three sessions to grasp what other students can easily take in during one session. We do not want to sacrifice the student’s having a clear understanding for the sake of speed. Every student needs a solid basis for his newfound faith in God’s Word.—Prov. 4:7; Rom. 12:2.

3 As you conduct the study week by week, spend whatever time is necessary to help the student understand and accept what he is learning from God’s Word. Avoid a hurried pace that detracts from the richness of the truths being taught. Allow sufficient time to focus on the main points and to consider key scriptures that provide the basis for the teachings.—2 Tim. 3:16, 17.

4 Keep the Study Moving: While we want to avoid rushing through the study, we also want to avoid becoming sidetracked. If a student is inclined to speak at length about personal matters, we may need to arrange to discuss these after the study.—Eccl. 3:1.

5 On the other hand, our own enthusiasm for the truth can make it a challenge not to talk excessively during the study. (Ps. 145:6, 7) An occasional side point or experience can enrich a study, but we would not want these to become so numerous or lengthy that they hinder the student from acquiring an accurate knowledge of basic Bible teachings.

6 By covering a reasonable amount of material at each study session, we help Bible students to “walk in the light of Jehovah.”—Isa. 2:5.

72


Part 6—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies When a Student Raises a Question

1 Once a Bible study is well established, it is usually best to consider Bible teachings in an orderly manner rather than jump from subject to subject. This helps the student to build a foundation of accurate knowledge and to progress spiritually. (Col. 1:9, 10) Often, though, students raise questions on various subjects during the study. How should these be handled?

2 Be Discerning: Questions related to the study material being considered can usually be answered on the spot. If a question will be addressed later in the study publication, it may be sufficient simply to point that out. However, if a question is unrelated to the study material or will require research to answer properly, it may be better to consider the matter after the study or at another time. Some find that writing the question down assures the student that his question is being taken seriously and helps prevent the study from becoming sidetracked.

3 Many Bible teachings are considered only briefly in our basic study publications. What if a student has difficulty accepting a certain teaching or holds strongly to a false belief? It may be beneficial to consider additional material that thoroughly discusses what the Bible says on that subject. If the student is still not convinced, leave the subject for another time and continue on with his regular study. (John 16:12) As he gains a broader knowledge of the Bible and progresses spiritually, he may come to understand that Bible teaching.

4 Be Modest: If you are not sure of the answer to a question, resist the temptation to venture an opinion. (2 Tim. 2:15; 1 Pet. 4:11) Explain that you will research the matter and return with an answer. You might even use the opportunity to teach the student how to do research. Progressively show him how to use the various research tools provided by Jehovah’s organization. In this way he will eventually be able to answer his own questions.—Acts 17:11.

73


Part 7—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Offering Prayer at the Study

1 In order for Bible students to make spiritual progress, Jehovah’s blessing is essential. (1 Cor. 3:6) Therefore, it is proper to open and close an established study with prayer. We can often do this from the very first study with people who are religiously inclined. With others, we may need to discern the appropriate time to introduce prayer. You might use Psalm 25:4, 5 and 1 John 5:14 to help the student see why prayer should be offered and also use John 15:16 to explain the importance of praying to Jehovah through Jesus Christ.

2 Who should offer prayer at a Bible study? If a baptized brother accompanies a sister on a study, he would offer prayer, although the sister might conduct the study while wearing a head covering. (1 Cor. 11:5, 10) On the other hand, if an unbaptized male Kingdom publisher accompanies a sister on a study, she would offer prayer. In such a situation, she should wear a head covering when praying as well as when conducting.

3 What the Prayer May Include: Prayers at a Bible study need not be lengthy, but they should be specific. Besides seeking God’s blessing on the study and giving thanks for the truths learned, it is fitting to give praise to Jehovah as the Source of instruction. (Isa. 54:13) We can also include expressions that reflect our sincere interest in the student and our appreciation for the organization that Jehovah is using. (1 Thess. 1:2, 3; 2:7, 8) Our asking for Jehovah’s blessing on the student’s efforts to apply what he is learning can help him to see the importance of being a ‘doer of the word.’—Jas. 1:22.

4 Many are the benefits of prayer. It brings God’s blessing. (Luke 11:13) It emphasizes the seriousness of studying God’s Word. As the student listens to our prayers, he is learning how to pray. (Luke 6:40) Moreover, prayers that spring from a heart filled with love for God and gratitude for his matchless qualities can help the student to develop a personal relationship with Jehovah. [Study Questions] 1. (a) Why is it proper to open and close a Bible study with prayer? (b) How can we introduce

prayer at a Bible study? 2. If a sister is accompanied on a Bible study by a baptized brother or by an unbaptized male

publisher, who would offer prayer? 3. What are appropriate matters to include in the prayers offered at a Bible study? 4. Opening and closing a Bible study with prayer brings what benefits?

74


Part 8—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Directing Students to the Organization

1 Our goal in conducting Bible studies is not only to teach doctrinal information but also to help students become part of the Christian congregation. (Zech. 8:23) The brochure Jehovah’s Witnesses—Who Are They? What Do They Believe? can help us to do this. Place a copy with new Bible students, and encourage them to read it. In addition, take a few minutes each week on the study to share a point about Jehovah’s organization.

2 Congregation Meetings: The principal way in which Bible students come to appreciate God’s organization is by associating with us at congregation meetings. (1 Cor. 14:24, 25) Therefore, you might begin getting them acquainted by describing the five weekly meetings, one meeting at a time. Mention the title of the next public talk. Show them the material that will be considered at the Watchtower Study and at the Congregation Book Study. Describe the Theocratic Ministry School and the Service Meeting. When you have an assignment in the school, perhaps you could rehearse it with them. Share outstanding points that were presented at the meetings. Use photographs in our publications to help them visualize what takes place. From the very first study, invite them to attend.

3 When the Memorial, assemblies, and the visit of the circuit overseer approach, take a few minutes to explain and build enthusiasm for these arrangements. Progressively answer questions such as: Why are we called Jehovah’s Witnesses? Why do we refer to our meeting places as Kingdom Halls? What are the duties of the elders and ministerial servants? How are the preaching work and the territory organized? How is our literature produced? How is the organization financed? What are the roles of the branch office and the Governing Body in overseeing the work?

4 Instructive Videos: Another way Bible students can see Jehovah’s marvelous organization is by means of our videos. These can take them To the Ends of the Earth, acquaint them with Our Whole Association of Brothers, and show them how we are United by Divine Teaching. A woman who had received our magazines and other literature for five years was moved to tears by the video Jehovah’s Witnesses—The Organization Behind the Name. She had come to trust the Witnesses that visited her, but after watching the video, she felt that she could trust the organization too. A formal study was started with her, and the following week, she attended meetings at the Kingdom Hall.

5 By spending a few minutes each week with our students and using the tools that have been provided, we can progressively direct Bible students to the one organization that Jehovah is using today.

[Study Questions]

1. Why is it beneficial to share a point about Jehovah’s organization each week on a Bible study?

2. How can you encourage Bible students to attend congregation meetings?

3. What features of the organization might we discuss?

4, 5. How can our videos build appreciation for the organization?

75


Part 9—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Preparing Students to Witness Informally

1 When Andrew and Philip realized that Jesus was the promised Messiah, they could not hold back from telling others the thrilling news. (John 1:40-45) Likewise today, as Bible students begin to exercise faith in what they are learning, they are impelled to speak about it. (2 Cor. 4:13) How can we encourage them to witness informally and prepare them to do so effectively?

2 You might simply ask the student whether he has spoken to others about what he has learned from the Bible. Perhaps there are friends and family members whom he could invite to sit in on the study. Ask him if any of his workmates, schoolmates, or other acquaintances have expressed interest. In this way he can begin to give a witness. Help him appreciate the need to exercise discernment and to be respectful and kind when speaking with others about Jehovah God and his purposes.—Col. 4:6; 2 Tim. 2:24, 25.

3 Sharing Their Beliefs: It is very important to train Bible students to use God’s Word when sharing their beliefs. At selected points during the study, ask the student: “How would you use the Bible to explain this truth to your family?” or “What Bible text would you use to prove this to a friend?” Note how he responds, and show him how to base his teaching on the Scriptures. (2 Tim. 2:15) By so doing, you will be preparing the student to witness both informally and, when he qualifies, in the organized preaching work with the congregation.

4 It is wise to prepare Bible students to face opposition. (Matt. 10:36; Luke 8:13; 2 Tim. 3:12) When others raise questions or make comments about Jehovah’s Witnesses, this may open the way for students to give a witness. The brochure Jehovah’s Witnesses—Who Are They? What Do They Believe? can equip them to be “ready to make a defense.” (1 Pet. 3:15) It provides accurate information that new ones can use to help well-meaning friends and family members understand our Bible-based beliefs and activities.

76


Part 10—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Training Students in the HousetoHouse Ministry

1 When the elders determine that a Bible student qualifies as an unbaptized publisher, he may begin to share with the congregation in the public preaching work. (See Organized to Do Jehovah’s Will, pp. 79-81.) How can we help the student to meet the challenge of preaching from house to house?

2 Preparing Together: There is no substitute for good preparation. Show the student where he can find suggested presentations in Our Kingdom Ministry and the Reasoning book, and help him select a simple approach that is practical for the local territory. From the start, encourage him to feature the Bible in his ministry.—2 Tim. 4:2.

3 Practice sessions are very beneficial for a new publisher. As the student rehearses the presentation, show him how to handle tactfully the responses that are common in the territory. (Col. 4:6) Assure him that Christian ministers do not need to know the answer to every question that a householder might raise. Often it is best to handle such questions by offering to do research and to return to discuss the matter further.—Prov. 15:28.

4 Preaching Together: The first time the student shares in the house-to-house ministry, let him observe as you give the presentation that the two of you prepared together. Then get him involved. In some cases, it may be best to have the new publisher give only part of the presentation, such as reading and commenting on a scripture. Take into consideration the personality and abilities of the student. (Phil. 4:5) Be generous in giving commendation as you progressively train him in the various aspects of the preaching work.

5 It is important to help a new publisher establish a regular schedule for participating in the ministry, doing so weekly if possible. (Phil. 3:16) Make definite arrangements to work together in service, and encourage him to work with other zealous ones also. Their example and association will help him to develop skill and find joy in preaching from house to house.

77


Part 11—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Helping Students to Make Return Visits

1 When a Bible student begins to share in the preaching work, he will meet people who show interest in the good news. How can we help the new publisher to make effective return visits and to cultivate the interest he finds?

2 Preparation for a return visit begins with the initial call. Encourage the student to take a sincere interest in those with whom he speaks. (Phil. 2:4) Progressively train him to draw them out, to listen to their comments, and to note the things that concern them. When someone shows interest, have the new publisher write down the pertinent information about the call. Use that information to help him plan further discussions.

3 Preparing to Return: Review the initial call, and show the student how to select an aspect of the Kingdom message that will appeal to the householder. (1 Cor. 9:19-23) Prepare together a brief presentation that features one Bible text along with a paragraph in a study publication. In addition, prepare a question that can be raised at the conclusion of the discussion to lay the groundwork for the next visit. Show the new publisher how to add to the person’s knowledge of God’s Word with each successive visit.

4 It is also helpful to provide the student with a simple introduction. After greeting the householder, he might say: “I enjoyed our previous conversation, and I have returned to share further Bible information on [mention the topic].” You may also need to show the new publisher how to respond if a different person answers the door.

5 Follow Up Diligently: Encourage the student to set a good example in returning promptly on all who show interest. Finding people at home may require persistence in calling back. Teach the student how to make appointments to visit again, and help him appreciate the need to return as promised. (Matt. 5:37) Train the new publisher to be kind, considerate, and respectful as he searches for sheeplike ones and cultivates their interest.—Titus 3:2.

78


Part 12—Conducting Progressive Bible Studies Helping Students Start and Conduct Bible Studies

1 When our Bible students begin sharing in the field ministry, they may be intimidated by the thought of starting and conducting their own Bible studies. How can we help them develop a positive attitude toward this essential part of our ministry?—Matt. 24:14; 28:19, 20.

2 Once a Bible student qualifies to be an unbaptized publisher, he is likely already taking full advantage of the Theocratic Ministry School. The training he receives in preparing and presenting student assignments will help him to develop the teaching skills that are needed by “a workman with nothing to be ashamed of, handling the word of the truth aright.”—2 Tim. 2:15.

3 Teach by Your Example: Jesus trained his disciples by giving clear instruction and setting a fine example. He said: “Everyone that is perfectly instructed will be like his teacher.” (Luke 6:40) Your imitating Jesus by setting a proper example in your own ministry is vital. As your student observes your lead in the ministry, he will appreciate that the objective in making return visits is to start Bible studies.

4 Explain that when we offer a study, it is not generally necessary to describe the study arrangement in detail. Often it is best simply to demonstrate the study by using one or perhaps two paragraphs from a study publication. Helpful suggestions for doing this can be found on page 8 of this issue and on page 6 of the January 2002 Our Kingdom Ministry.

5 When appropriate, invite the student to accompany you or another experienced publisher on other Bible studies. He might share in commenting on a paragraph or a key scripture. Thus, by observation, the student will learn much about conducting progressive Bible studies. (Prov. 27:17; 2 Tim. 2:2) Give him commendation, and discuss how he can improve.

6 Training new publishers to be teachers of God’s Word will equip them for the “good work” of starting and conducting studies of their own. (2 Tim. 3:17) How satisfying it is to work side by side with them in extending the loving invitation: “Let anyone that wishes take life’s water free”!—Rev. 22:17.

79

*** km 4/01 p. 8 Witness as a Good Neighbor ***

Witness as a Good Neighbor 1 Jesus said to “love your neighbor as yourself.” (Matt. 22:39) Undoubtedly, you “work what is

good” toward fellow believers, but can you widen out in your love toward those people who live nearby? (Gal. 6:10) In what ways?

2 By Identifying Yourself: Do your neighbors know that you are a Witness? If not, why not call on them in field service? The results may surprise you! Or if you would feel more comfortable, try to witness to them informally. When outdoors, you might see them working in their yard or casually walking by on the street. Approach them with a warm smile. Endeavor to speak about your beliefs, the location of the Kingdom Hall, and what goes on there, and let them know whoever else from the neighborhood attends. Extend an invitation to the meetings. Be determined to bear thorough witness about the good news to everyone you know.—Acts 10:42; 28:23.

3 By Your Exemplary Conduct: Your neighborly conduct speaks volumes about you and may open the way to give a witness. It also ‘adorns the teaching of God.’ (Titus 2:7, 10) Show genuine interest in your neighbors. Be friendly and understanding. Respect their right to privacy and quiet surroundings. If one of them becomes ill, be considerate and offer to help. When a new family moves into the neighborhood, stop by to welcome them. Such kind acts leave a favorable impression and are pleasing to Jehovah.—Heb. 13:16.

4 By the Appearance of Your Property: Being a good neighbor includes caring for your home so that it is presentable. A home and yard that are clean and attractive are a witness in themselves. But a home that is dirty or that has discarded items lying around will likely detract from the Kingdom message. Thus, it is very important to keep your home, yard, and vehicles clean and in good repair.

5 Displaying concern for those outside the Christian congregation demonstrates love for your neighbors. What may be the outcome? It may well be that “as a result of your fine works of which they are eyewitnesses,” some of them will “glorify God.”—1 Pet. 2:12.

80

*** km 6/05 p. 4 Witnessing Effectively in Public Places *** Witnessing Effectively in Public Places

1 Like Jesus’ early disciples, Christians today seek to share the good news with people wherever they can be found. (Acts 16:13; 17:17; 20:20, 21) As a result of their efforts to witness in public places, they are finding interest among people who might otherwise never have been contacted in the house-to-house ministry.

2 Discernment is needed when witnessing publicly. Usually, it is best to work inconspicuously. For example, if too many publishers witness in the same area or visit the same businesses, some people may feel overwhelmed by our presence. This detracts from the dignity of our work and may limit our effectiveness. What can be done to prevent this from happening? Some congregations that have many areas for public witnessing have found it helpful to organize these into individual territories. (1 Cor. 14:40) In addition, we can contribute to good order by working only in our congregation’s assigned territory unless specific arrangements have been made through the Congregation Service Committee to assist another congregation.—See the November 1998 Our Kingdom Ministry, p. 6, pars. 18-19.

3 Approaching People: When Jesus spoke with a woman at a well, he started with a brief remark and progressively expanded the conversation as her interest became manifest. (John 4:7-26) This approach is also effective in certain settings today. Some publishers find that to get into the proper frame of mind for public witnessing, it is helpful to spend a few minutes greeting people and showing personal interest in them before presenting the Kingdom message. They comment on a topic of local interest, which often leads to a conversation. As others express their concerns, they listen carefully. Before long, they are sharing comfort from God’s Word.—Rom. 15:4.

4 Cultivating Interest: Each time we have a good discussion, we should try to make arrangements to cultivate the interest. How can we do this? As the discussion is coming to a close, you might take out your notebook and say: “I have enjoyed our conversation. Is there any way we can continue at another time?” Or say: “I would like you to read an article that I am sure will interest you. May I bring it to your home or office?” Some publishers simply ask: “At what number can you be reached?” This often elicits a favorable response.

5 Many people who were first contacted in public places have accepted Bible studies. Such studies can be conducted at the person’s home, at his place of employment, in an appropriate public setting, or by telephone. May we make it our aim to start Bible studies as we witness effectively in public places.

[Study Questions]

1. In imitation of Christians in the first century, how are Christians today giving a witness in public places, and with what results?

2. Why is discernment needed when witnessing in public places, and how can we contribute to good order?

3. What approach have some found effective when witnessing in public places?

4. How can we cultivate the interest we find?

5. What aim should we have when witnessing publicly?

81

*** km 7/90 p. 4 Presenting the Good News—By Telephone ***

Presenting the Good News—By Telephone

1 We prefer to preach the good news to people face-to-face, but circumstances may make witnessing over the telephone a necessary alternative. Publishers temporarily or permanently confined to their homes because of illness or physical disability may make good use of the telephone for witnessing. Also, telephone calls can be very successful in contacting the residents of high-security buildings, mobile-home courts, or other areas where one may not be permitted to enter without a prior invitation. Telephone witnessing presents unique challenges, but with careful thought and planning, these can be overcome.

2 Sometimes names may be obtained from directories in lobbies of buildings or from mailboxes. Telephone directories can then be used to locate the telephone numbers. This should be done under the direction of the service overseer so that telephone territories can be organized and complete records kept. HOW TO PREPARE

3 A warm, pleasing voice is needed for effective telephone witnessing. Avoid making calls early in the day, late at night, and during mealtimes. It is not necessary to let the telephone ring many times. If you reach a telephone answering machine, you might say: “My name is . . . , and I am calling to share the Bible’s hope for the future. I will call you again.” It may be best to treat the call as a not-at-home and telephone again at another time.

4 Thoroughly rehearse your presentation beforehand so that it does not sound as if you are reading it. Make the householder feel that you are personally interested in him by attempting to involve him in the conversation. Personalize your call by using your first and last name in your introduction, and strive to use the householder’s name throughout the conversation.

5 Speak slowly and deliberately, but do not pause unless actually asking a question, as a pause may be interpreted as a question. You might say, “My name is . . . , and I am calling you because I am not able to come to see you personally.” Then, without pausing, you can continue as follows: “The purpose of my call is to invite your opinion on a very interesting question. Have you ever wondered if . . . ?” You can change the question by asking, “Has it ever occurred to you . . . ?” or “Have you ever thought about . . . ?” There are no wrong answers to these questions, and they provide an easy way for the householder to enter the conversation. Do not invite negative responses by saying, “I hope I am not interrupting you” or “I hope you are not too busy.” Assume it is a good time unless the householder tells you otherwise.

82

6 If the person asks, “Whom do you represent?” simply say without pausing, “I am one of Jehovah’s Witnesses, and I am calling to invite your opinion on this interesting question. Have you ever wondered . . . ?” If the householder asks, “Where did you get my telephone number?” you could reply, “From the directory, and I am calling to invite your opinion on this interesting question. Has it ever occurred to you . . . ?”

7 Some have had success in simply telling the householder that we have a free program for answering Bible questions and then mentioning some of the chapter titles in the Live Forever book. Or you could say, “Since your building is secured due to high crime, I am calling to invite your opinion. Why do you think there is such a high crime rate today?”

8 In one high-security building, not much success was experienced until telephone witnessing was tried. The result was that 14 new Bible studies were started. Thus, limited-access buildings can constitute virtually untouched territory and have tremendous potential. With a positive attitude, knowing that we have Jehovah’s help, we may find telephone witnessing another effective way to present the good news.—2 Tim. 4:5.

83

*** km 2/01 pp. 56 Successful Telephone Witnessing ***

Successful Telephone Witnessing

1 Our objective as Jehovah’s Witnesses is not merely to engage in preaching the good news but also to reach everyone possible with the Kingdom message. (Acts 10:42; 20:24) While the house-to-house work continues to be the principal way to reach people, we realize that not even by this systematic method do we contact everyone. So to ‘fully accomplish our ministry,’ we are using other methods—including telephone witnessing—to find sheeplike individuals.—2 Tim. 4:5.

2 In many places, people live in high-security apartments, multi-family complexes, or gated communities, where it is difficult to engage in our traditional door-to-door method of reaching people. Even in territories where we can work from house to house, a substantial number of people are not at home. However, many publishers are having excellent success in reaching these residents by telephone. In a morning of house-to-house work, one married couple had nine not-at-homes. After returning to the Kingdom Hall, they looked these up in a reverse directory that lists telephone numbers by addresses. They called the numbers and found eight of the householders at home!

3 Are you reluctant to include telephone witnessing in your ministry? One brother admits: “I don’t like anyone calling me at home to sell me anything, so I have a mental block about this type of witnessing.” However, after making just two phone calls, he said: “I love it! I never thought that could happen, but I love it! People are relaxed on the phone, and you have everything you need within reach. This is great!” A sister had a similar reaction: “I was really not excited about telephone witnessing. To tell you the truth, I did not want to do it. But I tried it and found it to be very fruitful. I have 37 return visits from phone witnessing and more studies than I can care for!” If you are willing to try telephone witnessing, you too can be successful.

4 Organizing for Telephone Witnessing: The witnessing activity of the congregation comes under the supervision of the service overseer. Depending on the need, the body of elders may choose to appoint another elder or a qualified ministerial servant to work closely with him in organizing telephone witnessing. The brother caring for territories should also be involved, since he will assign the territories and keep an up-to-date record. Likewise, the circuit overseer will be interested in the progress of the program.

5 If there are areas in your territory not accessible by door-to-door witnessing, telephone territories should be prepared. The brother assigned will carefully make a list of the addresses that are to be converted into such territories, which should be kept relatively small so that they can be worked regularly. All territory maps with those areas on them should be marked with a notation that the specified section is designated for telephone witnessing.

84

6 From where can you obtain the telephone numbers? A reverse directory that lists phone numbers by addresses may be available at the public library. If a high-security complex has its own telephone list, perhaps you can get the numbers from there. Otherwise, it may be possible to copy the names of the residents from the directory in the lobby and to look them up in a standard telephone book.

7 The elders can take an active interest in this work by arranging for those with experience in telephone witnessing to train others, perhaps through the Pioneers Assist Others program. Periodically, a local needs part on the Service Meeting may be devoted to enhancing the success of this feature of witnessing.

8 When elders make shepherding calls on shut-ins or the infirm, they can be alert to encourage these ones to participate in telephone witnessing. Perhaps an elder can make a few calls while the publisher observes. Then the publisher may enjoy an opportunity to make a call. Many who have started in this way spend a few minutes each day in this work, and they really love it.

9 Suggestions for Success: When Jesus sent out his disciples to preach, he “sent them forth by twos.” (Luke 10:1) Why? He knew that by working together they would learn from and encourage each other. The same is true in telephone witnessing. By working as partners, you can learn from each other, discuss your results, and offer suggestions for the next conversation. Even during a phone call, you can help each other locate appropriate information.

10 To promote clear thinking and concentration, sit where you can lay your witnessing materials—Bible, Reasoning book, Require brochure, magazines, and so forth—in front of you. Write out some presentations, and have them where you can see them. Be prepared to keep accurate and complete records, including the date and time of day so that you will know when to follow up the interest found.

11 People are often cautious when hearing an unfamiliar voice on the phone. So be warm, friendly, and tactful. The householder has only the sound of your voice to determine your character and sincerity. Relax and speak from your heart. Speak slowly and clearly and with sufficient volume to be heard. Allow the householder opportunity to speak. Use your full name, and mention that you live in the community. We do not want people to think that we are telemarketers. Rather than saying that you are calling all the residents in a particular building or complex, personalize your call.

12 Telephone Presentations: Many of the introductions on pages 9-15 of the Reasoning book can be adapted to telephone witnessing. You might say: “I’m calling you on the phone because I’m unable to come and see you personally. The purpose of my call is to ask your opinion on a very interesting question.” Then state the question.

85

13 The first presentation under the heading “Crime/Safety” could be used this way: “Hello. My name is……………... I live in the community. I want to assure you that I am not selling anything or taking a survey. I am calling because of my concern about the matter of personal safety. There is a lot of crime around us, and it affects our lives. Do you think the time will come when all people will be able to walk on the street at night and feel safe? [Allow for response.] Let me read what God has promised to do.”

14 Using the direct approach to offer Bible studies over the phone has had good results. The study may be demonstrated in a few minutes. Offer to visit the individual at his home to continue the study, or if the person is reluctant, offer to continue the study by phone on another day.

15 When you close a conversation, have in mind something that will lead to your visiting the person at his home or to mailing a piece of literature. If the person hesitates to give you his address, offer to phone again. It may take several calls before he feels comfortable enough to invite you to his home.

16 Taking the Initiative: A 15-year-old sister started her morning service with a phone call. She talked to a woman who agreed to accept a Knowledge book. When the sister delivered the book to the home, the woman wanted to know how the youth knew her phone number, since it was unlisted. The sister had dialed it by mistake! The woman welcomed a study and is now an unbaptized publisher.

17 A sister signed out a telephone territory but held off working it for three weeks because of fear. What gave her the courage to start? She remembered the January 22, 1997, Awake! article entitled “When I Am Weak, Then I Am Powerful.” It was about a Witness who preaches by telephone in spite of physical limitations. The sister said: “I prayed to Jehovah and asked for strength. I asked him to give me the proper words to give my presentation.” What was the result of her first day of telephone witnessing? She reports: “Jehovah answered my prayer. The people gave me their attention, and I arranged for a return visit.” Later her telephone witnessing resulted in a Bible study. She concludes: “Jehovah has taught me once more to trust in him and not in myself.”—Prov. 3:5.

18 Presenting the truth by telephone has become a successful method of preaching the good news. Prepare well, and participate wholeheartedly. Do not become discouraged if a favorable response is not forthcoming on the first few tries. Pray for Jehovah’s direction, and compare notes with others who are preaching in this exciting way. With a desire to miss no one in our territory, may we thoroughly carry out our ministry with urgency.—Rom. 10:13, 14.

86

*** km 11/00 p. 2 What Do You Say to an Answering Machine? *** What Do You Say to an Answering Machine?

The telephone is an effective means of witnessing to people who cannot be found at home or who live in territories that are inaccessible. However, more and more people do not answer the phone—an answering machine does it for them. When this happens, what can you do? Do not hang up. Instead, have a well-prepared response written out that you can read over the phone. Practice doing so in a pleasant, conversational voice. What can you say?

You could extend a warm invitation to the householder to attend the next Public Meeting at the Kingdom Hall. You might say: “I am sorry that I did not find you at home. If you would like to hear a Bible-based discussion of [title of public talk], please come to the Kingdom Hall of Jehovah’s Witnesses. The public is invited. No collections are ever taken.” Then state clearly the day and time of the meeting, and give the street address or describe the location of the Kingdom Hall.

Be alert to any new ones who may attend the meetings, introduce yourself to them, and make them feel welcome. Do not forget to offer a free home Bible study!

*** km 5/03 p. 7 Question Box *** witnessing by telephone Question Box

▪ When witnessing by telephone, should we explain the donation arrangement?

When we give a witness in person, it may be possible to explain that the worldwide Bible educational work of Jehovah’s Witnesses is supported entirely by voluntary donations and that we are happy to accept such donations. However, no mention of donations or the donation arrangement should be made when witnessing by telephone, as this could be misinterpreted as a form of telephone solicitation. The ministry of Jehovah’s Witnesses is noncommercial in every way.—2 Cor. 2:17.

▪ When witnessing by telephone, what should we do if a person requests that Jehovah’s Witnesses not call again?

The wishes of the person should be respected. A dated note with the name of the person should be placed in the territory envelope so that publishers will avoid calling that number in the future. Once a year, the list of people who have requested that we not call should be reviewed. Under the direction of the service overseer, experienced, tactful publishers can be assigned to contact these people to determine their current feelings.—See the June 1994 Our Kingdom Ministry Question Box.

87

*** km 11/96 p. 2 Question Box *** writing letters

Question Box

▪ What should we keep in mind when writing letters to householders whom we have been unable to find at home?

For a variety of reasons, we are finding it increasingly difficult to contact people when we visit their homes. Some publishers have found letter writing to be a practical way to reach them. While this can produce some good results, there is a need to consider some reminders that can help us to avoid some difficulties:

Do not use the Society’s return address. This would improperly indicate that the correspondence was sent from our offices, causing unnecessary problems and sometimes extra expense.

Make sure you have the correct address and sufficient postage. Do not address letters to “Occupant”; use a specific name. Do not leave letters in the door when no one is at home. Brief letters are best. Enclose a tract or a magazine rather than attempt to write out a lengthy

message. Typewritten letters are much easier to read and create a more favorable impression. Letters are not counted as return visits unless you have personally witnessed to the individual

previously. If you are writing to a person who formerly showed interest, you should provide an address or

phone number so that you can be contacted. Explain our Bible study program. Extend an invitation to the meetings of the local congregation. Give the address and meeting

times. Do not continue to send letters to not-at-homes after turning in the territory; the publisher who

currently holds the territory is responsible for working it.

88

*** km 12/07 p. 8 Comfort the Brokenhearted ***

Comfort the Brokenhearted 1 At no other time in mankind’s history has there been such a need to provide comfort. Following the

lead of our King, Christ Jesus, we also work to “bind up the brokenhearted.”—Isa. 61:1. 2 Approach: To comfort people, our ministry should be characterized by a well-balanced, positive

presentation. When we keep discussions about the world’s bad deeds and false doctrines to a minimum, Scriptural truth and the bright hope of God’s comforting promises are foremost in the conversation. This does not mean that Armageddon should not be discussed. Our commission is to proclaim both “the year of goodwill on the part of Jehovah and the day of vengeance on the part of our God,” and to “warn the wicked one from his wicked way.” However, the warning of Armageddon and a description of its destructive results is not meant to overshadow the theme of the good news of God’s Kingdom.—Isa. 61:2; Ezek. 3:18; Matt. 24:14.

3 From Door-to-Door: It is not uncommon to find people who are downhearted because of sickness, the death of a loved one, injustices, or economic problems. As imitators of Christ, we are “moved with pity” and show a sympathetic attitude toward those whom we meet in the ministry. (Luke 7:13; Rom. 12:15) Although we share a scripture or two related to the problem, we must prove to be “swift about hearing,” thus allowing the person to express his feelings. (Jas. 1:19) After first listening, we are in a better position to provide comfort.

4 At an appropriate time in the conversation, we might say, “I would like to share with you some encouraging words from the Bible.” Good judgment should be used so as not to endeavor to refute every wrong view that the person may express. Rather, our focus should be to provide encouragement and comfort by using the Scriptures to fortify the heart. In this regard, you may consult Reasoning From the Scriptures pages 117-121 under the heading “Encouragement.” Or you may furnish the householder with a copy of the tract Comfort for the Depressed and review the encouraging material therein.

5 Look for Opportunities to Comfort Others: Do you know of a neighbor, workmate, schoolmate, or family member that is in need of comfort? Why not make an effort to visit such ones at their home with the goal of sharing comfort from the Scriptures? Knowing why they need comfort, you can prepare for that particular situation. In this regard some have written letters or made telephone calls. True love of neighbor will move us to show fellow feeling and to provide needed comfort from the Scriptures.—Luke 10:25-37.

6 Yes, we are commissioned to comfort those who mourn, to lift saddened hearts, and to instill hope for a bright future. This is the comfort that people around the world need. Talking joyfully about the many good things God has promised will bring comfort and hope to the honesthearted. May we always remember the need to bind up the brokenhearted.

89

*** km 7/04 p. 4 How to Preach in Business Territory ***

How to Preach in Business Territory

1 Would you like to preach in territory where people generally welcome visitors and where not-at-homes are rare? You may be able to do so right in your congregation territory. How? By calling on the businesses found there. Publishers witnessing from store to store often enjoy good results.

2 Some congregations have business districts as part of their assigned territory. The brother caring for the territory may prepare special map cards of these heavily concentrated business sections. Any residential territory map cards that overlap them should clearly indicate that the businesses are not to be worked as part of the territory. In other territories, businesses can be worked along with the residences. If you have never done business witnessing, start by trying a few smaller stores.

3 Use a Simple Approach: When witnessing from store to store, it is important to dress as you would for a meeting at the Kingdom Hall. It is also good to choose a time when the store is not busy. If possible, enter when there are no customers waiting to be served. Ask to speak to the manager or the person in charge. Be brief and to the point. What might you say?

4 When speaking with a storekeeper or manager, you might say something like this: “Business people have such full schedules that we rarely find them at home, so we are visiting you at your workplace. Our magazines give a global perspective on current events.” Then feature one brief point from one magazine.

5 Or you might try this simple approach: “Many people would like to know more about the Bible but have very little time. This tract explains a free study program that is available to help you find answers to your Bible questions.” Then point out pages 4-5 of the tract Would You Like to Know More About the Bible?

6 If the person in charge seems to be busy, you might just offer a tract and say: “I will stop by again when you are not so busy. I would like to know what you think of this tract.”

7 Cultivating Interest Shown: You may even be able to conduct a Bible study in business territory. A special pioneer regularly delivered the magazines to a businessman. When the man expressed appreciation for what he was reading, the pioneer demonstrated the Bible study arrangement, using the Require brochure. A study was established right there at the man’s place of work. Taking into account the circumstances, the pioneer limited it to 10 or 15 minutes each time. May we, likewise, continue to search for deserving ones by witnessing in business territory.

[Study Questions] 1. What are some advantages of witnessing in business territory?

2. How can business witnessing be organized?

3. What will help us to be effective when witnessing from store to store?

4-6. What can we say when witnessing to a storekeeper or manager?

7. How can we cultivate the interest we find in business territory?

90

*** km 6/93 p. 1 Why Tracts Are So Valuable in Our Ministry Today *** Why Tracts Are So Valuable in Our Ministry Today

1 In the January 1, 1991, issue of The Watchtower, page 30, there was an experience entitled “He Found a Tract on the Track.” It told of a railroad maintenance supervisor who found one of our tracts wedged under a rail. He read the tract immediately and then told his son-in-law: “Today I have found the truth!” Both men ordered more literature and studied it. Now, over a hundred of their descendants are active in the truth. This shows what can result from reading just one tract.

2 Making Use of Opportunities: The brothers everywhere are making use of opportunities to place tracts. One Witness youth noted that her schoolteacher was feeling sad because of the death of her mother-in-law. The young sister wrote her teacher a comforting letter and enclosed the tract What Hope for Dead Loved Ones? The teacher wrote a thank-you note and then spoke with our young sister. Now this teacher regularly accepts the magazines from her.

3 Some publishers who were witnessing on a street that led to a cemetery saw people whitewashing graves. The publishers used the opportunity to offer them tracts. The next day was a holiday on which many people visit the cemetery, so the publishers decided to stand at the entrance of the cemetery and offer tracts. Over five hundred tracts were placed, with only three persons refusing them. The next year, publishers returned and distributed more than a thousand tracts, with only six refusals. A number of individuals expressed deep appreciation. One man read the tract as he was leaving, and shortly he returned to speak with the sister who had given it to him. He said: “There is someone I would like to have read this message. May I have another one?”

4 Tracts are a handy size and easy to carry with us wherever we go. When having informal conversations with others, whether strangers or acquaintances, we should strive to make a brief statement that could lead into discussing one of the eight tracts that we now have available. This could be done while talking with neighbors, while shopping or waiting for an appointment, while visiting relatives, or in many other situations.

5 Why Effective: The tracts are appealingly colorful. They are brief. Householders and those we meet in informal situations are not overwhelmed, feeling obligated to do extensive reading. Yet, the message is absorbing and informative. The reader gets a solid Scriptural view of the issue addressed in the tract. After receiving the tract Life in a Peaceful New World and having it reviewed with him, one young man exclaimed: “Never have I heard such encouraging information about the world’s situation!”

6 We want to use these tracts on every appropriate occasion. Many publishers have found them helpful in getting conversations started in house-to-house work. Numerous studies now being conducted were started with a tract. On page 4 of this issue of Our Kingdom Ministry, there are some practical suggestions on how to use tracts effectively. Yes, tracts are small but valuable tools for our ministry.

91

*** km 11/01 pp. 34 We Have a New Tool for Starting Studies! *** (Bible Tract)

We Have a New Tool for Starting Studies!

1 The American woman was a devout Roman Catholic. She faithfully defended the church’s teachings. She even made a pilgrimage to the Vatican. And yet, when one of Jehovah’s Witnesses called at her door, she accepted the offer of a home Bible study. Why? Because she wanted to learn what the Bible says and her church did not offer a home Bible study. What does this experience teach us? That we never know who is likely to accept a free Bible study.—Eccl. 11:6.

2 Have you ever hesitated to tell people that we are willing to study the Bible with anyone who is interested? Does everyone in your community know that we offer this free service? How can we make sure that they do? By making use of a new tool! It is an attractive, six-page tract entitled Would You Like to Know More About the Bible? Let’s get acquainted with this tract, subheading by subheading.

3 “Why Read the Bible?” The reasons that the tract gives are very appealing. It explains that the Bible contains “loving instruction from God,” showing how to approach him in prayer for help and how to receive his gift of everlasting life. (1 Thess. 2:13) The tract refers to various Bible “truths that give enlightenment,” such as what happens after we die and why there is so much trouble on earth. It describes “godly principles in the Bible” that when applied bring physical benefits and promote happiness, hope, and other desirable qualities. The tract refers to one more reason for reading the Bible—the prophecies about the future that show what is just ahead of us.—Rev. 21:3, 4.

4 “Help in Understanding the Bible”: The tract states: “All of us need help in understanding God’s Word.” Then it describes our method of studying the Bible: “Usually it is best to study the Bible progressively, beginning with basic teachings.” While making it plain that “the Bible is the authority,” the tract specifically mentions the Require brochure as something that will help the student “to understand Scriptural references on a variety of subjects.” The next subheading raises a compelling question.

5 “Are You Willing to Spend Time Each Week to Understand the Bible?” The tract explains that the Bible study can be arranged at a time and place convenient for the student, either in the privacy of his or her own home or even over the telephone. Who can share in the discussion? The tract answers: “Your entire family. Any friends that you choose to invite may also share. Or if you prefer, the discussion can be held with just you.” For how long must one study? It explains: “Many set aside an hour each week to study the Bible. If you are able to spend more time or are limited

92

to less time each week, the Witnesses will make themselves available to help you.” There is the key! We are willing to adjust to the circumstances of each student.

6 “An Invitation to Learn”: A coupon is provided on which the recipient of the tract can request the Require brochure or a visit to explain our free home Bible study program. The cover of the Require brochure is shown in full color. Can you not see why this tract will encourage more honesthearted ones to accept our help? Now, how can we make the best use of this new tool?

7 To Whom Can You Offer the Tract? The tract can be handed to people in person or left at not-at-homes. It can be distributed from house to house, on the street, and in business territory. Offer it to people whether they accept our literature or refuse it. Insert it into the magazines or other publications that are placed. Enclose it when you are writing letters. Offer to mail it to those whom you contact by telephone. Always have copies with you to distribute when shopping, when using public transportation, and when witnessing informally. Give it to anyone who calls at your door. Offer it to your relatives, neighbors, workmates, schoolmates, and other acquaintances. Endeavor to get this tract into the hands of everyone you meet! Then what?

8 If the Response Is Immediate: Some individuals will respond immediately by saying that they would like to have a Bible study. Therefore, whenever engaged in field service activity, be sure you always have two copies of the Require brochure—one for the student and one for yourself. If the person is willing, start the study right then and there. Open to the inside cover, and read “How to Use This Brochure.” Then go right to lesson 1, and demonstrate the study. What could be easier?

9 If Your Listener Needs Time to Think About It: Before too much time elapses, endeavor to contact him again. When you do, be sure to have the Require brochure with you. Show him the table of contents on the inside cover. Let him pick the subject that looks the most interesting to him. Turn to it, and begin discussing the lesson he chose.

10 Following Up Magazine Placements: If you left the tract along with a set of magazines, you might return with this approach: “The last time I called, I was pleased to leave with you a copy of the Watchtower magazine. Perhaps you noticed that the full title of the journal is The Watchtower Announcing Jehovah’s Kingdom. Today I would like to explain what this Kingdom is and what it will mean for you and your family.” Then open the Require brochure to lesson 6. Beginning with the first paragraph, read and discuss as much as the householder has time for. Then make arrangements to return another day and finish the lesson.

11 Do Not Run Out of Tracts: The service overseer and the brothers who handle literature supplies will want to keep an ample supply of the Know the Bible tract on hand at all times in the congregation. Keep some in your pocket or purse, in your car, at your workplace, at school, near the entrance to your home—wherever they will be handy. Of course, carry some in your

93

witnessing case for those times when you meet someone with whom you can converse about the Bible.

12 May Jehovah Bless Our Efforts: A desirable goal for all Christians is to teach the truth to someone else. (Matt. 28:19, 20) Are you currently conducting a home Bible study? If you are, can you find time for another one in your weekly schedule? If you are not now conducting a study, surely you wish you were. Pray for Jehovah to bless your efforts to find someone with whom you can study. Then work in harmony with those prayers.—1 John 5:14, 15.

13 We have a new tool for starting studies! Get familiar with it. Distribute it freely. Do all you can “to work at good, to be rich in fine works, to be liberal, ready to share” what you have learned about the Word of God.—1 Tim. 6:18. [Box on page 4] OPPORTUNITIES TO DISTRIBUTE THE TRACT ▪ Day-to-day conversations ▪ When someone accepts our literature ▪ When no one is at home ▪ When we make return visits ▪ When we meet someone in street witnessing ▪ When we witness in business territory ▪ When doing informal witnessing ▪ When writing letters ▪ When riding public transportation ▪ When someone calls at our door ▪ When speaking with relatives, neighbors, workmates, schoolmates, and other acquaintances

94

*** km 4/93 p. 8 Tie In the Tracts With Other Literature ***

Tie In the Tracts With Other Literature

1 Of all the magazines being published today, only The Watchtower and Awake! can help sincere readers find the path to everlasting life. As you converse with people during April and May, some will show unmistakable interest in the Kingdom message, and you may draw their attention directly to the latest magazines or one of the Society’s colorful brochures. Others may initially show little interest. In such cases, first you might discuss a point or two in a tract; then if the householder shows further interest, tie in the tract with the magazine or brochure you are featuring.

2 You could say: ▪ “Most people would agree that in today’s world, there are more problems than solutions. Did you know that many of our most serious problems were foretold in the Bible?” Then you may turn to pages 4 and 5 of the tract Will This World Survive? and discuss some of the problems.

3 If you are featuring the April 1 Watchtower and the householder shows interest in what you have read from the tract, you can point to the article entitled “Follow the Light of the World” and explain how Jesus Christ will ultimately solve all man’s problems. Then offer to return at a convenient time to discuss the matter further.

4 If the April 8 “Awake!” is being highlighted, you could use the introduction outlined in paragraph 2 of this article and then add: ▪ “Many are skeptical of the ability of religion and politics to solve our problems, but they wonder whether science has the answer.” Then read an appropriate point in the article “Can Science Meet the Challenges of the 21st Century?” It is quite likely that this article will appeal to many young people, especially students.

5 When featuring the “Look!” brochure, you might use a different approach: ▪ “Many people wonder what happens to us when we die. Some say we go either to heaven or to hell; others are not sure. The Bible’s answer is both surprising and reassuring.” Then you could introduce and discuss portions of the tract What Hope for Dead Loved Ones? Thereafter you could refer to pages 16 and 17 in the brochure if the householder shows interest in the tract.

6 When witnessing to Jewish people, use the tract A Peaceful New World—Will It Come?, which features quotations from the Hebrew Scriptures. You could ask the householder the two questions presented in the first paragraph of the tract. After he responds, direct his attention to the first paragraph on page 3. This points to the Messiah as the means by which the peaceful new world will come. If the householder shows further interest, use the April 1 Watchtower in the way suggested in paragraph 3 of this article.

7 If you are a new publisher, you will no doubt appreciate a simple approach. Why not obtain a supply of the tract Will This World Survive? and follow the suggestions outlined above in paragraph 2?

8 We are honored to bring the message of salvation to the homes of people. In our search for ‘deserving ones,’ let us make good use of our tracts and tie them in with other literature when interest is found.—Matt. 10:13.

95

*** km 6/93 p. 4 Use Tracts to Introduce the Greatest Man Book ***

Use Tracts to Introduce the Greatest Man Book

1 During the month of June, many publishers will be using tracts to arouse interest in the book The Greatest Man Who Ever Lived. This approach helps them to determine the degree of interest and to decide whether it would be appropriate to offer the book to a particular householder on the initial visit.

2 Will This World Survive? Tracts are of great assistance in starting conversations. They help to capture the attention of householders because the tracts deal with meaningful subjects that affect them personally.

For example, you may say something like this:

▪ “In talking with people, we have noticed that many mention their concern over . . . [choose a current event in the news]. It seems that world conditions are going from bad to worse. Some even wonder if this world can survive. How do you feel about that? [Allow householder to respond. Most people are optimistic.] I read something encouraging I would like to share with you. It is in this tract. [Hand householder the tract Will This World Survive? as you hold an identical tract in your hand.] Notice how Jesus prophesied that . . . ” Read from a paragraph on page 4 or 5 that coincides with the current event mentioned in your introduction. If the individual shows genuine interest, you may decide to show the Greatest Man book. If it seems appropriate, turn to additional information on Jesus’ prophecy highlighted in chapter 111. Before leaving, you may be able to explain briefly the overall nature of our worldwide work and describe how it is supported. Also, be sure to raise a question on a subject for discussion when you return.

3 Life in a Peaceful New World: What does living in a peaceful new world mean to you? Generally, people think of lovely scenes of majestic rivers and peaceful valleys, with beautiful animals living at peace with one another. Those who are distressed by present world conditions may find the prospect of a peaceful new world most refreshing.

4 Are you prepared to offer something refreshing and pleasant to your neighbors, your workmates, and those you meet from house to house?

Using the tract “Life in a Peaceful New World,” you could say something like this: ▪ “Do you think it will ever be possible for people to live in peace as shown on the cover of this tract? [Allow householder to respond.] Please look at the last sentence in the first paragraph on page 2. It asks: ‘But is it just a dream, or fantasy, to believe these conditions will ever exist on earth?’ [Then read the next paragraph in the tract.] That quotation about new heavens and a new earth is from the Bible, at 2 Peter 3:13. If it’s convenient for you to get your Bible, we can read Psalm 104:5 to learn more about the earth’s future.” Or you could just read the verse from your Bible. If the individual shows interest, direct the discussion to the Greatest Man book, chapter 133.

5 Further return visits will need to be made to ‘water’ the seed that has been planted. (1 Cor. 3:6, 7) The article below suggests how a study might be started in the Greatest Man book, either on the initial call or on your return visit.

96

*** km 12/92 pp. 34 Using Tracts to Produce Beneficial Results ***

Using Tracts to Produce Beneficial Results

1 Jehovah’s modern-day organization has a history of successfully using tracts. The very name of our legal corporation, Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society, implies that tracts play a vital part in the dissemination of the good news. From 1881 to 1918, more than 300 million tracts were distributed by Jehovah’s people. Many of those who became part of the remnant of Christ’s brothers during this period were first introduced to the truth by means of these early tracts.

2 In 1987 renewed emphasis was placed on the use of small tracts with the release of four colorful ones that have been available since then. It was announced at the 1992 “Light Bearers” District Convention that this series of tracts was to be enlarged with the addition of four more colorful and thought-provoking tracts. They are Comfort for the Depressed, Enjoy Family Life, Who Really Rules the World?, and Will This World Survive? Are you using all eight tracts to produce beneficial results in your ministry?

3 Good results come from using the tracts effectively. We will need to familiarize ourselves with each of them. For example, have you read them over carefully to get in mind what each one discusses? Have you thought about what type of person each tract will appeal to? Thoroughly familiarizing yourself with each tract will build your confidence in using them in the house-to-house work as well as in many situations where you can give an informal witness.

4 Use in the House-to-House Ministry: One circuit overseer writes: “I am having fine success by starting most of my discussions with the tract.” Have you tried this approach? Why not use tracts as a means to introduce your conversation? With eight tracts, we now have eight stimulating introductions to choose from. Each tract gives us an opportunity to start a Bible study either on the initial call or on a return visit.

5 There are other opportunities for using tracts. During a conversation at the door, you may learn that the person has recently lost a loved one in death or that someone in the family is ill. People who experience great sorrow or who are trying to cope with prolonged difficulties often develop negative emotions and become depressed. How loving it would be to share the encouraging message found in the tract Comfort for the Depressed! You may learn that the person was recently divorced or that he has lost his employment. Such experiences can be traumatic and take quite a toll on the family. Use the questions on page 2 of the tract Enjoy Family Life: “Why are families today bombarded with such serious problems? How can we enjoy family life?” Perhaps these are the very questions that the person has foremost in mind. Even if immediate interest is not apparent, it is possible that he will read the tract later on.—Eccl. 11:6.

6 In some congregations the territory has been worked frequently, and many people already have some of our literature. By using the tracts, we will have an opportunity to discuss something of interest with householders, draw them out, and get them to think about the Kingdom hope. Plant a question in their minds that can be discussed at a later time. Make a return visit, and develop this interest further. In time we may be able to begin studying with them using a brochure or a book they already have.

97

7 Use Tracts Informally: If we keep tracts within easy reach—in our shirt pocket, coat pocket, purse, or witnessing bag—we can use them on many different occasions, wherever people may be found. Use them when shopping, traveling, or talking to relatives or visitors. Tracts afford us the opportunity to give a brief witness. A tract is something that does not overwhelm a person but is pointed and tactful. It is more readily accepted than a book or the magazines, since there is not so much to read.

8 Be alert to opportunities to offer the tracts informally at school or your place of employment, at restaurants, at a gas station, and so forth. When making arrangements to take her grandmother to the doctor, a sister made sure that she had some tracts with her. At the doctor’s office, she started a conversation with an expectant mother. After showing the tract Life in a Peaceful New World to the woman, the sister asked: “Would you like to raise your child in a world like the one pictured here?” She was able to follow up that conversation with a visit to the woman’s house. This led to a number of regular return visits.

9 Bible Studies Can Be Started With Tracts: One circuit overseer reported that the congregation he was visiting started 64 home Bible studies during the week by using tracts when initially greeting the householder.

10 Have you tried offering a Bible study on initial house-to-house calls? By using a tract, you may be able to demonstrate briefly how a study is conducted. One sister did this using the tract Life in a Peaceful New World. Pointing to the picture, she asked the householder if she thought our earth would ever be like that. After the householder responded, the sister invited her to read 2 Peter 3:13 and Isaiah 65:17, which are highlighted in the tract. Our sister then said: “These promises are neither a dream nor a fantasy but are actually made in God’s Word, the Bible.” She then arranged to continue the conversation the following week. On the next visit, a number of the woman’s questions were answered and the book You Can Live Forever in Paradise on Earth was left. A Bible study resulted.

11 Are you one who is newly baptized or perhaps an unbaptized publisher who is gaining experience in your ministry? If so, you may want to seek out those who are more experienced and ask for their suggestions on using tracts in your congregation territory. We have many examples in the Bible of those who received encouragement and direction from mature ones in the faith.—Acts 18:24-27; 1 Cor. 4:17.

12 The Congregation Book Study conductor can be especially helpful in making arrangements for others to give you assistance in using tracts effectively. Parents have the responsibility to help their children make advancement in the preaching work. One young Witness was trained by her parents to offer the tract Life in a Peaceful New World. While with her mother on a Bible study, she offered a tract to the interested person’s husband. The husband was impressed that a young person would have such strong religious convictions. He thoroughly enjoyed reading the tract. Each time the young girl returned with her mother, she shared a scripture or Bible story that she had prepared especially for him. The man now reads the magazines regularly, has shown interest in the Revelation Climax book, and has attended a few meetings. All of this resulted because the parents took time to care for their responsibilities in teaching their daughter to make good use of the tracts.

13 Use Our New Tracts Effectively: In using the tract Will This World Survive?, you could introduce yourself and begin your conversation by saying: “Good morning. We are talking to people about the quality

98

of life today. Do you think the quality of life will improve, or will it continue to decline? [Allow for response.] Some think that what is happening in the world today is in fulfillment of Bible prophecy and that the world’s end is near. What do you think?” After the householder responds, offer the tract and draw attention to the three questions in the second paragraph. Then follow the development of the tract to show how a world has ended before and that this one also will end. As the visit is concluded, arrange for another visit to consider the Bible evidence that the end of the world is near.

14 Many times we find ourselves in a position to share the Kingdom message with others only briefly, such as at work or at school. At your place of employment, a discussion may come up about recent news items concerning government. You could agree that despite all efforts made by leaders who may be well-meaning, the world has suffered terribly throughout history. Then refer to the bottom paragraph on page 2 of the tract Who Really Rules the World? Read the three thought-provoking questions. If there is no time for a brief conversation, give the person(s) the tract and make arrangements to discuss these questions at another time or place.

15 As individuals and families, take time to consider how to present each of these different tracts. Hold practice sessions. How can you use the tracts with the other literature being featured in the field ministry for the month? What appointments do you have coming up where you could take a few tracts along with you? Will you come in contact with someone this week who would benefit from the timely message these tracts offer?

16 Deep love for Jehovah and concern for people will motivate us to do all we can in making the good news known. Using tracts regularly will help us do that. One young boy, seven years of age, wanted to help his next-door neighbor make it into the new system, so he gave her a tract, and a Bible study was started. It sounds so simple! But do we appreciate this simple approach in our ministry? The next time we leave a tract with someone, it may lead to a Bible study too. If we make wise use of tracts in preaching the good news of the Kingdom, we are certain to experience beneficial results.

99

*** km 8/05 p. 4 Are You Using Handbills? *** Are You Using Handbills?

One day an 11-year-old boy found a handbill advertising a public lecture on the subject of hell. “This keenly interested me,” he later explained, “as it seemed that I was always doing the wrong thing, and so I worried a lot about going to a burning hell when I died.” He attended the lecture, and about a year later, after several sessions of Bible study, he was baptized. Thus began the Christian career of Karl Klein, who later served for many years as a member of the Governing Body of Jehovah’s Witnesses. It all began with a handbill.

Handbills continue to be an effective witnessing tool today. Many publishers find that handing one to a person is a good way to introduce themselves and start conversations. Parents can involve their young children in the ministry by having them offer a handbill at the door. Publishers who share in witnessing by letter can advertise the meetings by enclosing a handbill. And, of course, handbills are a convenient way to invite Bible students and other interested ones to come to our meetings.

On the front of the handbill is a brief description of each congregation meeting. Since the Kingdom Hall address and meeting times are not included, you will need to supply that information when offering the handbill. There is space to print or stamp that information on the handbill if desired.

Are you making good use of handbills in your ministry?

*** km 8/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Buddhist? ***

What Will You Say to a Buddhist?

1 In some lands more than half of those getting baptized are from a Buddhist background. What is attracting these ones to the truth? How can you present the good news to a Buddhist?

2 Show Genuine Concern: Many former Buddhists have said that it was not profound reasoning that attracted them to the truth. Rather, they were touched by the genuine personal concern shown to them. An Asian woman living in the United States was so impressed with the friendliness of the sister who called on her that she agreed to study. She could not speak English well, but the sister was patient. When the woman was tired or unable to study, the sister would simply make a friendly visit and arrange for the next session. Eventually the woman, her two sons, and her aged mother got baptized. She returned to the land of her birth and assisted many others to learn the truth. One of her sons now serves at the branch office. What blessings resulted from reflecting Jehovah’s ‘kindness and love for man’!—Titus 3:4.

3 Buddhist Thought: Buddhists generally are tolerant of other ideas, but they do not consider it necessary to adhere to specific dogma. So their individual beliefs vary. A common theme in one branch of Buddhist teaching is that life is full of suffering, but by means of enlightenment, one can stop the continuous cycle of rebirth into unsatisfactory lives. It is said that to be liberated from

100

this cycle, one must achieve Nirvana, a state that cannot be described because it is not a place or an event but, rather, a void in which pain and evil are nonexistent. (See What Happens to Us When We Die?, pages 9-10.) What does this tell us? That it would be counterproductive to engage people in debates on Buddhist philosophy. Instead, discuss common problems that are of concern to all.

4 Emphasize Mutual Interests: Since Buddhists generally equate life on earth with suffering, the concept of everlasting life on earth may strike them as absurd. Still, all of us share the desire to enjoy happy family life, to see suffering eliminated, and to know the meaning of life. Note how such mutual needs can be highlighted.

5 You might try this introduction:

▪ “Today we live in a world where many innocent people suffer. What do you believe is needed to bring an end to pain and misery for all? [Allow for response.] There is an ancient promise that is very comforting to me. [Read Revelation 21:4.] Of course, that time has not yet come, but when it arrives, we would like to see it, wouldn’t we?” Then offer a publication that explains how suffering will end.

6 To an older person, you could say:

▪ “Perhaps you are as concerned as I am about the current flood of degraded ideas and the effect that these are having on our children. Why is there such an increase in immorality among young people? [Allow for response.] Did you know that this was foretold in a book that started to be written long before the founding of the Muslim, Christian, and Hindu religions? [Read 2 Timothy 3:1-3.] Note that these conditions prevail despite continuous learning. [Read verse 7.] This publication helped me to understand the truth that most people never learn. Would you like to read it?” Offer an appropriate book or brochure.

7 Buddhists generally respect the Bible as a sacred writing. So read from it directly. (Heb. 4:12) If the person feels uneasy about the influence of Western culture, mention to him that all of the Bible writers were Asians.

8 Which Publications Work Best? Published especially for Buddhists, the tract Will Suffering Ever End? is printed in Chinese, Japanese, Sinhalese, and Thai. In addition, many publishers have successfully used the following literature: the books Mankind’s Search for God, The Secret of Family Happiness, and Questions Young People Ask—Answers That Work; the brochures “Look! I Am Making All Things New,” and What Is the Purpose of Life—How Can You Find It?; and, if still available, Kingdom News No. 35, Will All People Ever Love One Another? Most Buddhists who are now learning the truth study the Require brochure first and then the Knowledge book.

9 Although Buddhist missionaries are said to have arrived in Athens nearly 400 years before Paul preached there, it is uncertain whether he ever met a person influenced by Buddhist thought. However, we do know how Paul felt about witnessing to people of all sorts. He made himself “the slave to all” so that he “might by all means save some.” (1 Cor. 9:19-23) We can do the same by showing personal interest in people and by emphasizing the hope that we hold in common as we witness to everyone we meet.

*** km 9/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Hindu? ***

What Will You Say to a Hindu?

1 As you may know, there are many Hindus living in various lands, including this country. This means that sooner or later you may meet a Hindu in the course of your ministry. When you do, how will you handle the call?

2 Remember These Points: Missionaries who have successfully witnessed to Hindus say that it is not necessary to make a deep study of Hinduism in order to give an effective witness. A simple, tactful presentation of the truth often brings a positive response. Ask to speak to the head of the household first. If his response is favorable, it will be easier to witness to other family members. At the outset avoid suggesting that you are bringing a message that is superior to what the householder believes or that

101

you want to discuss the only true God or the oldest sacred writings. Since many Hindus consider the Bible to be a Western book, you can break down prejudice by explaining that it does not promote colonialism or the superiority of one race over another.

3 Use the Right Tools: Two brochures have been prepared specifically with Hindus in mind. Why Should We Worship God in Love and Truth? is printed in Gujarati and Punjabi. Our Problems—Who Will Help Us Solve Them? is printed in 11 additional Indian languages. Both are available in English. The brochures “Look! I Am Making All Things New” and Does God Really Care About Us? have also proved effective when witnessing to those of Hindu background. The Require brochure and the Knowledge book can be used successfully to conduct Bible studies.

4 Establish Common Ground: It is not difficult to find common ground with Hindus. They believe that we are living in a time when wickedness is at its peak and that God will rid the world of its problems through a great catastrophe to be followed by an era of truth. You can see how easily these beliefs can be related to the Bible’s teachings about the last days, the great tribulation, and the coming new world. Since most Hindus view life as a series of problems for which there are no solutions, they are interested in the topics of family life, crime and safety, and what happens at death. Here are two sample presentations that you might try.

5 This may appeal to a family man:

▪ “I am visiting people who are concerned about the state of family life in many lands today. What do you think will help keep the family together? [Allow for response.] Some people know what the Hindu scriptures say about the family, but they have never had the opportunity to compare this with what the Bible has to say on the subject. I would like to share with you this thought at Colossians 3:12-14.” After reading the scripture, show the householder chapter 15 of the Knowledge book and say: “I would be pleased to spend a little time reading this chapter with you.”

6 A young person might respond to this:

▪ “No doubt you believe in God. What do you think God’s purpose is for us?” Allow for a response. Then read Genesis 1:28, and say: “In many places the earth is overpopulated and plagued with problems. Do you think the Creator would be willing to help us solve our problems?” After hearing the response, turn to an appropriate publication.

7 Enjoy Positive Results: A 22-year-old Hindu man approached a sister who was witnessing in a market and asked for a Bible study. He explained to her that eight years earlier he had overheard a Bible discussion between his mother and her. Although he had been impressed by the Bible’s practical answers to mankind’s problems, his mother was not interested and he had felt that he was too young to pursue the truth on his own. Now as an adult, he wanted to learn more. The young man wasted no time. In only 23 days, he completed his study of the Knowledge book, and just four months after he had met the sister at the market, he asked to be baptized!

8 A brother started a study with a Hindu man whom he met on a train. The man was experiencing difficulties in his marriage. He also had a drinking problem. The man agreed to have the Witness call on him and share the Bible’s advice on family life. The Bible’s moral teachings appealed to him, and he agreed to a Bible study. He and his family began attending meetings together. Later they shared the truth with friends and relatives. So far, six of these people have accepted the truth!

9 God’s will is that “all sorts of men should be saved and come to an accurate knowledge of truth.” (1 Tim. 2:4) That includes men and women who profess a non-Christian religion, such as Hinduism. If there are Hindus in your territory, why not visit them soon and use some of the suggestions presented in this article?

*** km 10/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Jewish Person? ***

What Will You Say to a Jewish Person?

1 In the first century, many of “the sons of Israel” responded appreciatively to the preaching of Jesus and his apostles. (Acts 10:36) As was true then, a number of sincere Jews today are wholeheartedly embracing the truth—not only in Israel but also in

102

Russia, the United States, and other countries. Would you like to be more successful in reaching out to Jewish people? The following suggestions will help you give a tactful witness both to religious and to secular Jews.

2 Witnessing to Religious Jews: It should be realized that religious Jews are often more concerned with observing the traditions of the rabbis than with defining specific doctrines. Indeed, they generally view tradition as having authority equal to the Scriptures. Hence, they are not necessarily interested in discussing deep Bible subjects. They also tend to think of the Bible as a Christian book. For that reason, it is usually best when referring to the Bible to use the terms “the Hebrew Scriptures,” “the Torah,” or “the Scriptures.” An excellent publication prepared especially for the Jewish population is the brochure Will There Ever Be a World Without War?

3 What topics might interest religious Jews? Well, they believe that there is one God, who is keenly interested in man. They also believe that God does intervene in human affairs. You might use these points to establish common ground. In addition, most Jews are keenly aware of the suffering of their people during World War II. They wonder why God permitted such injustice and when wickedness will come to an end. We are well equipped to answer such questions, referring, for example, to what our brothers experienced during the Holocaust.

4 Of course, to avoid alienating the householder, it is best not to bring up the matter of the identity of the Messiah too soon in the conversation. Instead, you might discuss the role that Moses played in Israel’s history and ask the householder if he believes that Moses’ teachings are relevant today. When it seems appropriate to discuss the identity of the Messiah, you might first read Deuteronomy 18:15, which states: “A prophet from your own midst, from your brothers, like me, is what Jehovah your God will raise up for you—to him you people should listen.” Ask the householder who it was that Moses had in mind when he spoke of a prophet like himself. Then cover a few points in the World Without War brochure, page 14, paragraphs 17 and 18.

5 Secular Jews View Matters Differently: Not everyone who identifies himself as Jewish accepts the teachings of Judaism. Many Jews are secular in their outlook. They are more interested in promoting a separate Jewish identity, with its culture, tradition, and education, than in practicing the Jewish religion. Some secular Jews are agnostics—a few are even atheists. Initially, little would be gained by quoting extensively from the Hebrew Scriptures. It would be more beneficial to approach the conversation as you would any discussion with a person who is not religious. You might explain, for example, how the Bible is practical for our day. If the householder does not believe that the Bible is inspired, some points in the World Without War brochure may be helpful, particularly those found in the section on page 3 entitled “The Bible—Inspired by God?”

6 When witnessing to a Jewish person, you might say:

▪ “Most of us have had the sad experience of losing a loved one in death. What do you think happens to us when we die?” Allow for a response. Then direct the householder to the box entitled “Death and the Soul—What Are They?” on page 22 of the World Without War brochure. The box compares what the Scriptures say about life after death with what the rabbis teach. Then turn to paragraph 17 on page 23, and show that according to the Scriptures, the dead will be resurrected to life on a paradise earth. Offer the brochure. In preparation for the return visit, you might mention that the patriarch Job entertained the resurrection hope. Refer to the scriptures cited at the end of paragraph 17, and offer to return and discuss them.

7 The books of Matthew, Mark, Luke, John, and Acts record experiences of Jews who listened to and acted on the truth. Jehovah is still holding the way to everlasting life open. Many sincere Jews may yet learn about Jehovah, the true God, so that they too can live forever in God’s new world.—Mic. 4:1-4.

*** km 11/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to a Muslim? *** What Will You Say to a Muslim?

1 Have you had the experience of witnessing to a Muslim? If so, you probably learned that Muslims have a fervent belief in God. However, they know little about the coming Paradise on earth as foretold by Jehovah’s prophets, and we would like to share that hope with them. (1 Tim. 2:3, 4) The following information should help you give a good witness.

103

2 Muslims believe in Allah, or God, and they believe that Muhammad is God’s prophet. Their holy book is the Koran, and their religion is called Islam, which means “submission.” The Koran states that lying and the worship of idols are wrong, that God is one, and that he is no part of a Trinity. Also, it teaches the immortality of the soul, hellfire, and a heavenly paradise. Muslims accept the Bible as God’s Word but believe that it has been changed, while the Koran, still in its original language, has been kept pure.

3 Be Friendly, Tactful, and Discerning: When engaging a Muslim in conversation, be friendly and tactful. (Prov. 25:15) Bear in mind that Muslim beliefs are firmly entrenched and that most of them have been learned by rote. Thus, reasoning on religious teachings and proving to themselves what God’s will is has not been a part of their spiritual development. (Rom. 12:2) To help Muslims, patience and understanding are vital.—1 Cor. 9:19-23.

4 Avoid using expressions that would in a Muslim person’s mind link you with Christendom. Make it clear that you are no part of either Catholic or Protestant religion, that you are different. Refer to the Bible as the Book of God. Since Muslims have an aversion to the term “Son of God,” it is usually best not to use it or to discuss this subject until spiritual progress has been made. However, you can speak about Jesus, referring to him as a prophet or messenger. Avoid arguing. If you observe that anger begins to surface, politely take your leave immediately.

5 It is best to speak with just one person and not with a group. Usually, it is advisable for women to witness to women, and men, to men. Obviously, there are exceptions to this, but good judgment should be used. Also, many Muslims are sensitive about what they consider to be immodest dress and grooming by women. Sisters need to be aware of this.—1 Cor. 10:31-33.

6 Things to Talk About: Speak frankly about the greatness of God and his love. Do not hesitate to state that you are a true believer, that God is one (not a Trinity), and that idol worship is wrong. Speak about the wickedness in the world today—wars, civil unrest, racial hatred, and the hypocrisy that is evident among so many religious people.

7 The brochure The Guidance of God—Our Way to Paradise will give you further insight into topics that can be used to open conversations with Muslims. It is designed to appeal to Muslims who live in an environment where they may feel free to study the Bible.

8 As a presentation, you might say:

▪ “I am making a special effort to speak to Muslims. I have been reading about your religion and believe that I am right in saying that Muslims believe in one true God and in all the prophets. [Allow for response.] I would like to talk with you about an ancient prophecy that foretells the transformation of the earth into a paradise. May I read to you what the prophet wrote? [Read Isaiah 11:6-9.] This prophecy makes me think of a quotation from the Koran that is found in this brochure.” Turn to page 9 in the Guidance of God brochure, and read the quotation in bold print, which refers to righteous ones’ inheriting the earth. If interest is shown, continue the conversation by discussing paragraphs 7 to 9 on the opposite page. Leave the brochure, and arrange for a return visit.—For another presentation, see the February 1998 Our Kingdom Ministry, page 6, paragraph 27.

9 When inviting someone to consider the Guidance of God brochure, it is best to call it a discussion, not a Bible study. When you complete the brochure, the student should be ready to study the Require brochure or the Knowledge book. Other publications that are especially designed for Muslims are the tract How to Find the Road to Paradise and the booklet The Time for True Submission to God.

10 With this knowledge of Islamic beliefs and sensitivities, we can be discerning in our selection of literature that we offer to Muslims and in the way that we witness to them. May Jehovah continue to bless our efforts to assist people of all sorts to call on his name and be saved.—Acts 2:21.

*** km 12/99 p. 8 What Will You Say to an Atheist? *** What Will You Say to an Atheist?

104

1 “I am an atheist,” a professor from Poland told a missionary in Africa. However, the sister was able to have a discussion with the woman and gave her the book Life—How Did It Get Here? By Evolution or by Creation? When the missionary returned the next week, the professor told her: “I’m no longer an atheist!” She had read the entire Creation book and now asked for a Bible study. What can you do to succeed in giving a witness to those who say that they do not believe in God? First, consider the various reasons why people make this claim.

2 Factors That Contribute to Disbelief: Not all atheists were raised as such. Many were exposed to a form of religion and at one time believed in God. However, serious health or family problems or certain injustices they experienced weakened their faith. For others, courses taught in schools of higher learning have had a negative impact on their concept of God. Note the following examples of atheists who eventually developed a strong belief in Jehovah God and became his Witnesses.

3 A woman in Paris had been born with a debilitating bone disease. Although baptized as a Catholic, she proclaimed herself an atheist. When she asked the nuns why God had allowed her to be born with such a disability, their answer was: “Because he loves you.” She refused to accept that absurd idea. Also, consider a young person in Finland who was diagnosed as having an incurable muscle disease and was confined to a wheelchair. His mother took him to a Pentecostal who claimed to cure sick people. But there was no miraculous healing. As a result, the young man lost interest in God and became an atheist.

4 A man in Honduras was raised a Catholic but studied Socialist philosophy and atheism. Convinced by university teaching that mankind is the product of evolution, he ceased to believe in God. Similarly, a woman in the United States was raised a Methodist. In college, she took psychology classes. How was her belief affected? She said: “In one summer they destroyed every bit of faith I had in religion.”

5 Reaching the Hearts of Sincere Ones: Many individuals who say that they do not believe in God would appreciate knowing if there is a solution to the problems of poor health, family discord, injustice, and so forth. They are sincerely interested in finding answers to such questions as: ‘Why does evil exist?’ ‘Why do bad things happen to good people?’ and ‘What is the meaning of life?’

6 A husband and wife living in Switzerland had both been raised as atheists. When they were first contacted with the truth, their response was negative. But they had serious family problems and were considering divorce. When the Witness visited again, she showed the couple from the Bible how to overcome their problems. The couple were astonished at the practical counsel contained in the Scriptures, and they agreed to a Bible study. Their marriage was strengthened, they progressed spiritually, and they got baptized.

7 What You Can Say to an Atheist: When someone tells you he is an atheist, endeavor to find out the reason why he says that. Is it because of the education he has received, the problems he has experienced, or religious hypocrisy and false teachings he has seen? You might ask him: “Have you always felt this way?” or “What is the reason for your conclusion?” His answer will help you determine what to say. Where powerful arguments are required, the book Is There a Creator Who Cares About You? may be just what is needed.

8 You might pursue a conversation with an atheist by asking:

▪ “Have you ever wondered: ‘If there is a God, why is there so much suffering and injustice in the world?’ [Allow for response.] May I show you the Bible’s view on this subject?” Read Jeremiah 10:23. After reading it, ask his opinion of the text. Then show him pages 16 and 17 in the brochure Will There Ever Be a World Without War? Or, instead, you may use chapter 10 of the Creator book. Invite him to accept the publication and read the material.—For further suggestions, see the Reasoning book, pages 150-1.

9 Admittedly, not all atheists will accept the truth. But there are many who are willing to consider another viewpoint. Use logic, persuasion and, above all, the power of God’s Word to help them see the truth.—Acts 28:23, 24; Heb. 4:12.

105

*** sg study 10 pp. 5152 pars. 912 Developing the Art of Teaching *** 9 Questions. Questions are especially helpful in effective teaching, as Jesus Christ often demonstrated. (Luke

10:36) So when conducting a Bible study you can follow his method, using the printed questions in the publications. But if you are a thorough teacher, you will not be satisfied if the student simply reads the answer from the book. In such a case you need additional questions that stimulate the student to put the thought into his own words. Sometimes all you need to say is: “That is right, but how would you explain it in your own words?”

10 You will also find leading questions to be helpful in teaching. These are questions that aid you to direct the mind of the person, on the basis of what he already knows, to a conclusion that perhaps he has never thought about. (Matt. 17:25, 26; 22:41-46) In effect you say to yourself: ‘I know this student has knowledge of this and that, so if I ask some questions in a logical sequence, he can arrive at the right conclusion. But if I skip the leading questions and outrightly ask him the main question, he may jump to the wrong conclusion.’ In other words, the student has information with which he can arrive at the answer. But he needs help. The easy way, of course, is to tell him the answer. But if you use leading questions, you not only make the answer more acceptable because the student states it himself, but also help him to develop thinking ability. Your questions will lead his mind along the steps of logical thought to the right conclusion. This will be of immeasurable value to him later.

11 At times you will find it desirable to ask viewpoint questions. By means of them you seek to find out what the student personally believes on a matter. For example, you might ask him what God’s law is on fornication. He may be able to quote a scripture that shows it is wrong. But does the student really agree with the answer he gave? Is that his personal view? You may wish to ask a question to find out what he actually thinks about fornication. You might ask, “What difference does it make whether we live that way or not?” You may then discern areas where more help is needed and you can follow through. Viewpoint questions help you to reach the heart of the student.

12 Questions are also helpful in the house-to-house ministry. For example, you want to find out what the householder is thinking so you can better help him to understand Bible truths. You also ask questions and invite his comment because you know that if he is given the opportunity to express his view, he will be more inclined to listen to what you say.

17 Directing attention to the Great Teachers. As a Christian teacher you should always be conscious of the importance of directing attention to Jehovah God as the Source of life and to Jesus Christ as God’s channel through whom life and blessings come. (John 17:3) Endeavor to develop in others a warm appreciation for these truly Great Teachers.

18 As you master the art of teaching you will also appreciate the part played by love. If a student really comes to love Jehovah God, then he will serve him faithfully. So, in the course of the study, at appropriate points, draw attention to the significance of what God has done and is doing for sinful men. Highlight the wisdom, justice, love and power of God, those attributes that always blend so wonderfully for the benefit of obedient humans. If a student’s heart is right, in time he too will feel a deep loyalty to Jehovah and a desire to share in magnifying his name.

106

*** sg study 14 pp. 7072 pars. 48 Tactful Yet Firm *** 4 Applying tactfulness in the field ministry. In the house-to-house ministry, you can show tactfulness by starting

your conversation with matters that are of concern to the householder and showing how God’s kingdom will provide the remedy. Appeal to the person’s love of righteousness, to his reason and to his desire for better things. Ridicule or condemnation of his religious views will only close his mind. So, instead of talking on matters that stir up controversy, appeal to the things people generally accept as right. If it is necessary to pass on to something more controversial, first find some point of agreement with the householder and stress that agreement. If you can impress on the mind of the householder the hope-inspiring truths of the Kingdom and its blessings, other matters will in due time be corrected as the person comes to appreciate God’s undeserved kindness.

5 The tactful person makes every effort to encourage the one to whom he is talking to enter into the conversation and reveal his views. Paul endeavored to think from the viewpoint of those to whom he witnessed, thus being better able to bring to bear powerful arguments in favor of the good news. (1 Cor. 9:20-22) We need to do the same. A sympathetic viewing of other people’s circumstances, why they are what they are, why they believe and speak as they do, will help one to deal with them tactfully, with empathy. It may be that different circumstances in life, different experiences, or relying on a different authority accounts for the way they think. Once you have some clue to the thinking of the other party, you can lead into your presentation of the good news in a positive way rather than giving needless offense because of not knowing how the other person thinks and his reasons for thinking that way.

6 Considering the other person’s viewpoint does not imply a compromising of what is right. Tact is not a distortion of facts. At all times there must be firm adherence to what is right. Otherwise a person may find that instead of being tactful he is compromising the truth. He may find that he is moved by fear of man rather than by love of righteousness. Yet, while tact does not involve compromising the truth, it does involve timing, that is, determining the right time to give out certain information. Sometimes it is tactful simply to ignore something that is said. It may be best to leave certain things for later, until a person is ready for them. As Jesus said to his disciples: “I have many things yet to say to you, but you are not able to bear them at present.” (John 16:12) So while we may not agree with the one with whom we are talking, we do not immediately have to point out every mistaken idea. If we did, it might serve only to close his mind and prevent further discussion.

7 When a householder, in the course of conversation, brings up many things from the Bible that he says are wrong, it is difficult in a brief time tactfully to refute every objection. Often it is best simply to ignore most of them and discuss only what bears on the particular matter under consideration. Or the householder may try to draw you into worldly arguments. Tactfully avoid involvement, giving the Bible’s answer to such worldly problems. In this way you will imitate the example of Jesus.—Matt. 22:15-22.

8 When meeting an angry householder, be tactful and yet firm. Do not compromise the truth just to try to calm him down. Rather, try to understand why he feels as he does, perhaps even asking him why he has that viewpoint. If he comments, you might say that, in turn, you would like to inform him as to why you feel the way you do. But no matter how far you are able to pursue the conversation, tactfulness will get the best results. Remember the counsel at Proverbs 15:1: “An answer, when mild, turns away rage, but a word causing pain makes anger to come up.” However, if some persons show themselves to be unreasonable, then it is best simply to leave.—Matt. 7:6.

107

*** sg study 17 pp. 8788 pars. 79 How to Write Letters ***

Study 17 How to Write Letters

1 In the early Christian congregation letters were put to good use in a number of ways. They were a means of keeping in touch with congregations. (Phil. 1:1) They were used to encourage those who had taken on special responsibilities. (2 Tim. 1:1, 2, 6) Letters upbuilt those who had recently become believers or who were faced with hardship. (1 Thess. 1:1-7; 3:1-7) And the early Christians used letters to keep in touch with those who had become close to them in the service of the Lord.—

3 John 1, 14. 2 Theocratic ministers of today also have many reasons for writing letters, and these letters can accomplish much good.

Business letters may be necessary at times. Public officials may have to be written to with regard to the Kingdom work. Tenants who live in exclusive apartment buildings, as well as those who live in isolated places, often can be contacted with the “good news” only by means of letters. Some publishers in your congregation may have moved away, or relatives may live at a considerable distance, and you may wish to show your loving concern for them by writing a letter. Also, there are times when you send a letter to express thanks or condolence.

3 Our letters should be worthy of our God-given ministry. They should be friendly, tactful and show loving consideration for those who read them. They should be positive and upbuilding, rather than negative and expressing a spirit of complaint, which tears down faith and depresses the reader. “Love builds up,” says God’s Word. (1 Cor. 8:1) Consider, too, the overall appearance and impression the letter will give. For the sake of neatness, it helps to have a fairly uniform margin around the sides and bottom of the letter. Smudges do not give a good impression. Also, good spelling and sentence structure deserve attention. However, if you are not skilled at these, do not let it discourage you from writing to friends. Warmth, interest and enthusiasm usually more than make up for errors in spelling and sentence structure. But spelling can be improved by using a dictionary, and sentence structure can improve as we note how others put words and phrases together. With these points in mind, let us now take a closer look at the various types of letters we may have occasion to write in connection with our ministry.

7 To give a witness. Letter writing has also proved valuable in preaching the Kingdom message. In some areas there are large apartments or residence hotels that cannot be worked freely, but we can write letters to the occupants. Then, too, some persons repeatedly are not found at home in the house-to-house work, but they do pick up their mail. And, for a publisher who is confined to his home, writing letters to these people may be the only way he has of sharing the Kingdom message with others.

8 When writing a letter to give a witness concerning God’s kingdom, it is good to introduce yourself first. You may also want to state why you are writing instead of making a personal visit. It will impress the recipient as to your earnestness. Then set out what you wanted to tell him personally if you could have visited. It is not difficult to do if you apply the principles that you have been learning in the ministry school. You may use a Scripture presentation from a recent copy of Our Kingdom Ministry or put in your own words a portion out of a recent issue of The Watchtower or Awake! or the book You Can Live Forever in Paradise on Earth. You might also enclose a tract, magazine or booklet and encourage the person to read it. Explain why this information is so important. As you do in the house-to-house work, you might suggest that he look up the scriptures in his own Bible. Then, with a view to your cultivating interest that may have been aroused, tell him how to get in touch with you and invite him to do so. Clearly give your name and address so that if he wishes to thank you or to subscribe for The Watchtower or Awake!, he will know where to write.

9 On the outside of the envelope, always show your own return address. Check to be sure that you have used sufficient postage, especially if you have enclosed literature. If the postage is not adequate, the householder may be charged for the amount due, and this may detract from your effort to give a good witness.

108

*** sg study 18 pp. 9294 pars. 814 Improving Your Answers ***

8 Answering objections in the field ministry. You will find that you have little difficulty in answering questions in the house-to-house ministry if you are regular in personal study and in attending meetings. But if you do not know the answer to a question that is asked, do not hesitate to tell the householder that. Then offer to get the information and return. If the person is sincere, he will be glad to have you do so.

9 Besides such questions, you may at times encounter objections. How will you handle them? Before you answer objections it is helpful to know something about the thinking of the person. You might ask what gives rise to his objection. For example, a person may object that he has heard that you do not believe in Christ, but in actuality he is simply confused because of the Trinity doctrine. Many objections are the result of such misunderstandings. It is important to come to a mutual understanding of the meaning of key terms before embarking on a discussion. In fact, this may answer the objection and make further discussion of the point unnecessary.

10 It is good, too, when objections are raised, to treat the matter as one of mutual interest, where possible, rather than as something that makes you opponents. So instead of considering an objection as unpleasant or distasteful, view the objection as a point that really does concern the householder. With this in mind, you might tell him that you are glad he brought the matter up. Consider it a key to continued conversation, as something that may open up the person’s mind to receive Bible truths. Why not practice this in the ministry school, including in your talks situations that require you to cope with objections?

11 At times when you are talking to an interested person someone else raises objections in order to disrupt your discussion. In such a situation, you might shift the burden of proof back to the objector. Jesus Christ used counter-questions to silence opposers who tried to interfere with his preaching. (Matt. 22:41-46) So it is good to keep in mind that the burden of proof is properly on the person who makes an assertion about some matter. For example, if a householder tells you: “You people do not believe in the Trinity,” in a tone that implies that such belief is required of Christians, you might say: “I believe everything the Bible teaches. Will you kindly show me from the Bible why I should believe that doctrine?” Then the burden of proof is on the other party to support what he claims to be the truth.

12 The most authoritative answer to anyone who claims to accept the Scriptures is one taken directly from God’s own Word. It is far more persuasive than anything that we personally might say. Of course, when giving answers, always remain calm and show courtesy, regardless of the attitude of your questioner. This befits a minister of God.

13 At Bible studies. At Bible studies there is usually a friendly, relaxed atmosphere, conducive to reasoning on matters. So, after you answer a student’s question, it is a good practice to ask whether he is satisfied. It may be that some points are still unclear in his mind. If you are not sure of a particular answer, offer to look it up for him. If further help is needed, you can inquire of a more experienced publisher. Remember, when you assist someone to gain a deeper insight into the Bible’s message you may be starting that one on the road to life, even as Philip the evangelist assisted the Ethiopian eunuch by answering his questions.—Acts 8:26-39.

14 In time it may be better not to answer all the questions brought up at a Bible study, but to save certain ones that will be covered in your further study material. Also, with a view to the student’s own progress, it is good to show him how to find answers by doing research himself. You might refer him to such Bible study helps as the indexes to the Society’s publications or an appropriate chapter in You Can Live Forever in Paradise on Earth. Then ask him later what information he found, and his understanding of it. Have in mind his spiritual growth, not merely answering his questions.

109

*** sg study 24 p. 122 Directing Attention to the Bible ***

Study 24 Directing Attention to the Bible

1 Our desire in the ministry is to direct the attention of everyone to God’s Word, the Bible. It contains the message that we preach, and we want the people to realize that what we say is not of our own originality but from God. People who love God have confidence in the Bible. When it is read to them, they listen and take its counsel to heart. But when they get out their own copy of the Bible and read it for themselves, the impression is considerably deepened. So, in the field ministry, when circumstances make it possible, it is wise to encourage the householder to get out his own copy of the Bible and look up the scriptures with you. Likewise, at congregation meetings, if all are encouraged to use their Bible, newer ones will more readily recognize that it is the source of our beliefs, and all will benefit from the added emphasis of visual impression.

*** be p. 62 p. 64 How to Improve Conversation Skills ***

How to Improve Conversation Skills

DO YOU generally find it easy to converse with others? For many, the very thought of engaging in conversation, especially with someone they do not know, causes anxiety. Such people may be shy. They may wonder: ‘What should I talk about? How can I get the discussion started? How can I keep it going?’ Confident, outgoing people may tend to dominate a conversation. Their challenge may be to draw others out and to learn to listen to what is said. So all of us, whether shy or outgoing, need to keep cultivating the art of conversation.

Start at Home

To improve your conversation skills, why not start at home? Upbuilding conversation can contribute much to the happiness of a family.

The foremost key to such conversation is caring deeply about one another. (Deut. 6:6, 7; Prov. 4:1-4) When we care, we communicate, and we listen when the other person wants to say something. Another important factor is having something worthwhile to say. If we have a regular program of personal Bible reading and study, there will be much that we can share. Wise use of the booklet Examining the Scriptures Daily can stimulate discussion. During the day, perhaps we have an enjoyable experience in the field service. We may read something that is informative or humorous. We should make it a practice to share these things during wholesome family conversation. This will also help us to converse with people outside the family circle.

Conversing With a Stranger

Many people hesitate to start a conversation with someone they do not know. But because of love for God and for their neighbor, Jehovah’s Witnesses make an earnest effort to learn how to converse in order to share Bible truths with others. What can help you to improve in this area?

The principle stated at Philippians 2:4 is valuable. We are encouraged to keep an eye, “not in personal interest upon just [our] own matters, but also in personal interest upon those of the others.” Think of it this way: If you have never met the person before, he views you as a stranger. How can you put him at ease? A warm smile and a friendly greeting will help. But there is more to consider.

110

You may have interrupted his thoughts. If you try to get him to discuss what is on your mind without concern for what is on his mind, will he respond favorably? What did Jesus do when he met a woman at a well in Samaria? Her mind was on getting water. Jesus initiated his conversation with her on that basis, and he soon turned it into a lively spiritual discussion.—John 4:7-26.

If you are observant, you too can discern what people may be thinking about. Does the person look happy or sad? Is he elderly, possibly infirm? Do you see evidence that there are children in the home? Does it seem that the person is materially well-off or that he struggles to obtain the necessities of life? Do home decorations or personal jewelry indicate a religious influence? If your greeting takes such things into account, the person may view you as someone who shares an interest in common with him.

If you do not meet the householder face-to-face, perhaps only hearing his voice through a locked door, what might you conclude? The person may live in fear. Could you use that information to start a conversation through the door?

In some places it is possible for you to draw a person into conversation by telling him something about yourself—your background, why you have come to his door, why you believe in God, why you began to study the Bible, and how the Bible has helped you. (Acts 26:4-23) Of course, this needs to be done with discretion and with a clear objective in mind. This, in turn, may move the person to tell you something about himself and how he views matters.

In some cultures, hospitality to strangers is customary. People may readily invite you to come in and sit down. Once you are seated, if you make a polite inquiry about the well-being of the family and sincerely listen to the response, the householder may be equally attentive to what you have to say. Other peoples show even more intense interest in visitors, so the preliminary greetings may be extensive. In the process, they may find that they have things in common with you. This can lead to a beneficial spiritual discussion.

What if there are many people in your area who speak languages other than yours? How can you reach these people? If you learn even simple greetings in some of those languages, the people will realize that you are interested in them. This may open the way for further communication.

How to Continue a Conversation

To keep a conversation going, be interested in the thoughts of the other person. Encourage him to express himself if he is willing to do so. Well-chosen questions can help. Viewpoint questions are best because they usually prompt more than a yes or no response. For example, after mentioning a problem of local concern, you could ask: “What do you think has caused this situation?” or “What do you think is the remedy?”

When you ask a question, listen attentively to the reply. Indicate your genuine interest by a word, a nod, a gesture. Do not interrupt. With an open mind, consider what is being said. “Be swift about hearing, slow about speaking.” (Jas. 1:19) When you do respond, show that you were really listening to what was said.

Realize, however, that not everyone will answer your questions. From some people the only response may be raised eyebrows or a smile. Others may simply say yes or no. Do not get frustrated. Be patient. Do not try to force the conversation. If the person is willing to listen, use the opportunity to share upbuilding Scriptural thoughts. In time, the person may come to view you as a friend. Then perhaps he will be willing to share his thoughts more freely.

As you talk with people, have an eye to the future. If a person raises a number of questions, answer some of them but leave one or two for the next time you talk together. Offer to do research, and then share the results with him. If he does not raise questions, you might conclude your conversation with a question that you believe will interest him. Offer to discuss it on the next call. A wealth of ideas can be found in the book Reasoning From the Scriptures, the brochure What Does God Require of Us?, and recent issues of The Watchtower and Awake!

111

*** be p. 66 p. 70 Know How You Ought to Answer *** Know How You Ought to Answer

SOME questions are like icebergs. The most substantial part lies hidden beneath the surface. An underlying issue is often more important than the question itself.

Even when the inquirer is eager for the answer, your knowing how you ought to answer may involve discerning how much to say and the angle from which to approach the subject. (John 16:12) In some cases, as Jesus indicated to his apostles, a person may ask for information to which he is not entitled or that would really not benefit him.—Acts 1:6, 7.

The Scriptures counsel us: “Let your utterance be always with graciousness, seasoned with salt, so as to know how you ought to give an answer to each one.” (Col. 4:6) Thus, before we answer, we need to consider not only what we are going to say but how we are going to say it.

Discern the Questioner’s Viewpoint

The Sadducees tried to entrap Jesus with a question about the resurrection of a woman who had been married several times. However, Jesus knew that they actually did not believe in the resurrection. So in his reply, he answered their question in a way that dealt with the mistaken viewpoint that was the underlying basis for that question. Using masterful reasoning and a familiar Scriptural account, Jesus pointed out something that they had never considered previously—clear evidence that God is indeed going to resurrect the dead. His answer so amazed his opposers that they were afraid to question him any further.—Luke 20:27-40.

To know how you ought to answer, you must likewise discern the views and concerns of your questioners. For example, a classmate or a workmate may ask you why you do not celebrate Christmas. Why does he ask? Does he really care about the reason, or is he simply wondering whether you are permitted to have a good time? To find out, you may need to ask what gave rise to the question. Then answer accordingly. You might also use the opportunity to show how following the Bible’s direction protects us from those aspects of the holiday that have become a frustration and a burden to people.

Suppose you are invited to speak about Jehovah’s Witnesses to a group of students. After your presentation, they may ask questions. If the questions seem to be sincere and straightforward, answers that are simple and direct may be best. If the questions reflect community prejudices, you might do more good by preceding your answers with brief comments about what can shape popular views on such issues and why Jehovah’s Witnesses choose to let the Bible set the standard for them. Frequently, it is beneficial to view such questions as subjects of concern, not as challenges—even though they may have been presented in that way. Your reply, then, affords you opportunity to broaden the viewpoint of your audience, provide them with accurate information, and explain the Scriptural basis for our beliefs.

How will you respond to an employer who does not want to give you time away from work to attend a convention? First, consider things from his viewpoint. Might your offering to do overtime at another time help? If you explain to him that the instruction given at our conventions helps us to be honest, trustworthy workers, might that make a difference? If you show that you are taking his interests into account, perhaps he will also give favorable consideration to what he realizes is important in your life. But what if he wants you to do something dishonest? A clearly stated rejection coupled with a thought from the Scriptures would state your position. But might more good be accomplished if you first reason with him that a person who is willing to lie or steal for him might also lie to him or steal from him?

On the other hand, perhaps you are a student who does not want to participate in certain unscriptural activities at school. Remember, the teacher probably does not share your views, and it is his responsibility to maintain discipline in the class. The challenges that face you are (1) to show regard for what concerns him, (2) to explain your position respectfully, and (3) to be firm for what you know will please Jehovah. For best results, more may be needed than a simple, direct statement of what you believe. (Prov. 15:28) If you are young, no doubt your father or mother will help you prepare something to say.

At times, you may be required to refute charges brought against you by someone in authority. A police officer, a government official, or a judge might demand that you answer questions about obedience to a certain law, your position of Christian neutrality,

112

or your attitude toward participation in patriotic ceremonies. How should you reply? “With a mild temper and deep respect,” the Bible counsels. (1 Pet. 3:15) Also, ask yourself why these issues are of concern, and respectfully acknowledge that concern. Then what? The apostle Paul referred to the guarantees of Roman law, so you might point out legal guarantees that apply in your case. (Acts 22:25-29) Perhaps facts about the position taken by early Christians and by Jehovah’s Witnesses worldwide would broaden the official’s viewpoint. Or you might point out how recognition of the authority of God actually motivates people to be more consistently obedient to proper laws of men. (Rom. 13:1-14) Against such a background, a statement of Scriptural reasons for your position might be favorably received.

Questioner’s View of the Scriptures

When deciding how to answer, you may also need to consider your questioner’s view of the Holy Scriptures. Jesus did this when answering the Sadducees’ question about the resurrection. Knowing that they accepted only Moses’ writings, Jesus reasoned on an account contained in the Pentateuch, prefacing his remarks by saying: “But that the dead are raised up even Moses disclosed.” (Luke 20:37) You may likewise find it advantageous to quote from portions of the Bible that your listener accepts and with which he is familiar.

What if your listener does not view the Bible as authoritative? Note what the apostle Paul did in his speech on the Areopagus, as recorded at Acts 17:22-31. He shared Scriptural truths without directly quoting from the Bible. Where necessary, you can do the same. In some places you may have to have several discussions with a person before making direct reference to the Bible. When you do introduce the Bible, you may be wise at first simply to offer some reasons why it is worthy of consideration rather than state firmly that it is God’s Word. Your aim, however, should be to give a clear witness about God’s purpose and, in time, to let your listener see for himself what the Bible says. The Bible is far more persuasive than anything that we personally might say.—Heb. 4:12.

“Always With Graciousness”

How appropriate that servants of Jehovah, who himself is gracious, are told to let their speech be “always with graciousness, seasoned with salt”! (Col. 4:6; Ex. 34:6) This means that we ought to speak with kindness, even when it may not seem deserved. Our speech should be in good taste, not rough or tactless.

Many people are under tremendous pressure, and daily they are subjected to verbal abuse. When we call on such people, they may speak harshly. How should we respond? The Bible says: “An answer, when mild, turns away rage.” Such an answer can also soften one who has an opposing viewpoint. (Prov. 15:1; 25:15) To people who experience roughness every day, a manner and a voice that express kindness can be so appealing that they may listen to the good news we bring.

We have no interest in arguing with those who show no respect for truth. Rather, our desire is to reason from the Scriptures with people who will allow us to do so. Regardless of the situation we encounter, we keep in mind that we ought to answer with kindness and with conviction that the precious promises of God are reliable.—1 Thess. 1:5.

Personal Decisions and Matters of Conscience

When a Bible student or a fellow believer asks what he should do in a given situation, how should you answer? You may know what you would personally do. But each person must bear responsibility for his own decisions in life. (Gal. 6:5) The apostle Paul explained that he encouraged “obedience by faith” among the people to whom he preached. (Rom. 16:26) That is a fine example for us to follow. A person who makes decisions mainly to please his Bible teacher or another human is serving men, not living by faith. (Gal. 1:10) So a simple, direct answer may not be in the best interests of the one who is making the inquiry.

How, then, could you reply in a manner that is consistent with the Bible’s guidelines? You might draw attention to appropriate Bible principles and examples included in the Bible record. In some cases, you might show him how to do research so as to find those principles and examples himself. You could even discuss the principles and the value of the examples but without applying them to the situation at hand. Ask the person if he sees in them something that might help him to make a wise decision. Encourage him to consider in the light of these principles and examples what course would be pleasing to Jehovah. You are thus helping him to ‘train his own perceptive powers to distinguish both right and wrong.’—Heb. 5:14.

113

*** be p. 71 p. 73 Communicating Through Letters *** Communicating Through Letters

LETTERS have improved the lives and behavior of millions of people. Most of the books of the Christian Greek Scriptures were originally letters. We today can write letters in order to build up new believers, keep in touch with friends, encourage brothers and sisters who have taken on special responsibilities, fortify those who are facing hardships, and relay information needed to care for congregation activities.—1 Thess. 1:1-7; 5:27; 2 Pet. 3:1, 2.

Letter writing is also an effective way to witness. In some areas, many people live in high-security apartment buildings or residence hotels that cannot be worked freely. Some are away from home most of the time, so we miss them when we witness from house to house. Others live in isolated places.

Sickness, bad weather, or a curfew may at times confine you to your home. Might you be able to write a letter to give a further witness to a relative or to someone you talked to informally? Has one of your Bible students moved? A letter from you might be just what he needs to keep his spiritual interest alive. Or perhaps you can share appropriate Scriptural information with those who have recently got married, become parents, or lost loved ones in death.

Witnessing by Letter

When writing to witness to someone you have never met, first introduce yourself. You might explain that you are participating in an international volunteer work. If it seems appropriate to do so, mention that you are one of Jehovah’s Witnesses. Let the person know why you are writing instead of making a personal visit. Write as if you were talking to the person face-to-face. Still, in line with the direction to “prove yourselves cautious as serpents and yet innocent as doves,” give serious thought to how much information you should divulge about yourself.—Matt. 10:16.

Include in the letter what you would have said to the person if you could have visited him. You might adapt an introduction from the Reasoning book or use a Scriptural presentation from a recent issue of Our Kingdom Ministry. You could pose a question and encourage the person to think about it. Some publishers simply explain that we have a free program for answering Bible questions and then cite some of the chapter titles from one of our study aids. A sample letter written to give a witness appears on page 73. It may give you some ideas, but it is good to vary the content. Otherwise, people may, in time, get the same letter repeatedly.

Some people are reluctant to read a long letter from a stranger. So it may be the course of wisdom to keep your letter brief. Bring your letter to a close before the recipient might tire of reading it. It would be appropriate to enclose a printed invitation to meetings at the Kingdom Hall. You could include a tract, a brochure, or an issue of The Watchtower or Awake! and explain that these can be provided on a regular basis if desired. Or you could ask if a visit may be made to the recipient’s home to speak with him further on the subject discussed.

A Word About Form

Take a look now at the sample letter. Notice the following: (1) It looks tidy, not cluttered. (2) Even if the envelope gets misplaced, the recipient will still have the sender’s name and postal address. (3) The purpose of the letter is stated simply and directly in the first paragraph. (4) Each main thought is dealt with in a separate paragraph. (5) In view of its purpose, the letter is neither too casual nor too formal.

In a more formal letter, such as one that the congregation secretary might send to the branch office, the name of the congregation would be included, along with the secretary’s own name, his postal address, and the date. The name and address of the person or organization to whom the letter is being sent would also appear. This is followed by an appropriate salutation. To close the letter, in some languages an expression such as “Very truly yours” or “Sincerely” appears above the signature. The signature itself should be handwritten.

114

In any letter, give attention to proper spelling, grammar, punctuation and, of course, neatness. Doing so will lend dignity to your letter and the message that it contains.

On the outside of the envelope, always provide a return address—preferably your own postal address. If you feel that it would be unwise to give your own address when witnessing by letter to strangers, ask the elders if they would approve of your using the return address of the local Kingdom Hall. The Watch Tower Society’s address should never be used for this purpose, as this would improperly indicate that your correspondence was sent from the Society’s offices and would cause confusion. If no return address is provided and literature is included, this too may give the wrong impression that the Society is the sender.

Make sure that you affix sufficient postage, especially if you have enclosed literature. If the postage is inadequate, the recipient may be charged for the amount due, and this would detract from your message. Remember that in many countries when a brochure or a magazine is enclosed, the postal rate is more than that required for just a letter.

The Right Tone

Once you have completed your letter, read it to evaluate the content. How does it sound? Is it friendly and tactful? Love and kindness are among the qualities that we endeavor to manifest in our dealings with others. (Gal. 5:22, 23) If you detect a negative tone or a hint of pessimism, adjust the wording.

A letter can go places that you cannot. This fact alone makes it a significant tool for the ministry. Since your letter represents you and the things you stand for, give thought to what it says, how it looks, and how it sounds. It may provide just what is needed to start, strengthen, or encourage a precious soul on the road to life.

[Box on page 73]

Phyllis Jonadab 124 Kingdom Way Paradise, NY 12563 June 1, 20—

Dear Mrs. Friendly,

My husband and I live in your neighborhood. We have not been able to speak with you personally, but we have some important information that we want to share with you. A sample of it is contained in the enclosed tract.

It is our privilege to share in a work that is being done by volunteers in upward of 200 lands. In all these lands, people are being invited to benefit from a program that helps people learn the Bible’s answers to such important questions as: Why do we grow old and die? What is the purpose of life? How can you find real happiness?

We engage in this activity because we are genuinely interested in our neighbors. Our work is not commercial. It is our hope that someday soon we will be able to talk to you personally. Please feel free to get in touch with us at the above address.

Sincerely, [Signature]

115

*** be study 31 p. 190 p. 193 Respect Shown to Others *** Study 31 Respect Shown to Others

What do you need to do?

Show consideration for others, according them honor.

Why is it important?

Showing respect is a Christian requirement that promotes an atmosphere in which others are more likely to accept what you present to them from the Bible.

THE Scriptures tell us to “honor men of all sorts” and “to speak injuriously of no one.” (1 Pet. 2:17; Titus 3:2) Indeed, every human we meet has “come into existence ‘in the likeness of God.’” (Jas. 3:9) Each person is someone for whom Christ died. (John 3:16) And all deserve to hear the good news in order to act on it and be saved. (2 Pet. 3:9) Some people have qualities or authority that merit special deference.

Why might some people try to excuse themselves from showing the sort of respect that the Bible encourages? Local culture may dictate who is eligible for honor according to caste, color, gender, health, age, wealth, or social status. Widespread corruption among public officials has eroded respect for authority. In some lands people are greatly dissatisfied with their lot in life, perhaps working long hours just to have the bare necessities, and they are surrounded by people who do not manifest respect. Youths experience peer pressure to join in rebellion against unpopular teachers and other authority figures. Many are influenced by television’s portrayal of children outsmarting and dominating their parents. It takes effort to keep such fleshly concepts from altering our regard for others. Yet, when we accord people dignity, this engenders an atmosphere in which an interchange of ideas is more readily possible.

Respectful Approach. A person who is engaging in religious work is expected to show respect by dressing and acting appropriately. What is viewed as appropriate decorum varies from place to place. Some consider it disrespectful to approach another person while wearing a hat or having one hand in a pocket. In other places, people might accept such decorum. Take local feelings into account so as not to offend. Doing so can help you to avoid impediments to your making known the good news effectively.

The same applies to our manner of addressing others, especially those who are elderly. It is generally viewed as impertinent for youths to call adults by their first name unless the youths receive permission to do so. In some places adults too are expected to refrain from addressing strangers by their first name. Also, many languages employ a plural form of the word “you” or some other device to show respect for someone older or in authority.

Respectful Acknowledgment. In smaller communities it is expected that you will acknowledge the presence of someone you encounter, either while walking along the road or when entering a room. This is accomplished by means of a simple greeting, a smile, a nod of the head, or even the raising of the eyebrows. Ignoring another person is viewed as disrespectful.

Some, though, may feel ignored even if you acknowledge their presence. How so? Because of their perception that you fail to see them as individuals. It is not uncommon for people to be categorized by some physical trait. People with disabilities and health problems are often shunned. Yet, God’s Word shows us how to treat such individuals with love and respect. (Matt. 8:2, 3) All of us are affected in some way by our inheritance of Adamic sin. Would you feel respected if others always identified you by your flaws? Would you not rather want to be recognized for your many positive qualities?

116

Respect also involves acknowledging headship. In some places it is necessary to speak to the head of the house before witnessing to others in the household. Although our commission to preach and teach comes from Jehovah, we recognize that parents are the ones authorized by God to train, discipline, and direct their children. (Eph. 6:1-4) Hence, when calling at a home, it is usually appropriate to speak first to the parents before engaging children in any extended discussion.

With age comes life experience that must be respected. (Job 32:6, 7) Acknowledging this helped a young pioneer sister in Sri Lanka who called on an elderly man. He at first objected to her visit, saying: “How can a youngster like you teach me the Bible?” But she replied: “Really, I didn’t come to teach but to share with you something I learned that made me so happy I just have to tell others.” The pioneer’s respectful response aroused the man’s interest. “Then tell me, what did you learn?” he asked. “I have learned how to live forever,” she said. The elderly man began to study the Bible with Jehovah’s Witnesses. Not all older people will voice a desire to be treated with such respect, but most will appreciate it.

It is possible, however, to carry displays of deference too far. In the islands of the Pacific and elsewhere, the respectful use of the customary form of address when approaching village or tribal chiefs can help the Witnesses to gain a hearing ear and an opportunity to speak to both the chiefs and the people under their jurisdiction. Yet, flattery is neither necessary nor proper. (Prov. 29:5) Similarly, a language may include honorifics as part of its grammar, but Christian respect does not require that these be multiplied excessively.

Respectful Delivery. The Bible urges us to explain the reason for our hope “with a mild temper and deep respect.” (1 Pet. 3:15) So, although we might be able quickly to expose the flaws of another person’s viewpoint, is it wise to do so in a manner that may deprive him of his dignity? Might it not be better to listen patiently, perhaps ask why he feels the way he does, and then take his feelings into account as we reason with him from the Scriptures?

Respect like that shown in one-on-one situations should also be evident when addressing an audience from the platform. A speaker who respects his audience will not harshly criticize them or exude an attitude that implies: “You could do this if you really wanted to.” Speaking in such a manner only discourages others. How much better to view the audience as an assembly of people who love Jehovah and want to serve him! In imitation of Jesus, we should show understanding when dealing with those who may be spiritually weak, less experienced, or slower to apply Bible counsel.

The audience will sense the speaker’s respect for them if he includes himself as one needing to apply God’s Word more fully. Thus, it is wise to avoid constant use of the personal pronoun “you” when applying scriptures. Note, for example, the difference between the question “Are you doing everything that you can?” and the statement “Each of us does well to ask himself: ‘Am I doing everything that I can?’” The point of each question is the same, but the first implies that the speaker does not put himself on the same level as his audience. The second encourages each person, including the speaker, to analyze his own situation and his own motives.

Resist the temptation to make witty remarks just for the sake of making the audience laugh. This detracts from the dignity of the Bible’s message. True, we should take delight in our service to God. There may even be facets of our assigned material that are somewhat humorous. Yet, to reduce serious matters to laughing matters betrays a lack of respect for the audience and for God.

May our approach, our demeanor, and our speech always demonstrate that we have come to view others the way that Jehovah has taught us to see them.

117

*** be study 33 p. 197 p. 200 Tactful yet Firm *** Study 33 Tactful yet Firm


Show discretion in what you say as well as how and when you say it, in order to avoid offending others needlessly.


If you are tactful, people may be inclined to listen with an open mind to the good news. Tactfulness will also help you to maintain good relations with fellow Christians.

TACT is the ability to deal with other people without giving needless offense. It involves knowing how and when to say things. This does not imply a compromising of what is right or a distortion of facts. Tact should not be confused with fear of man.—Prov. 29:25.

The fruitage of the spirit provides the finest foundation for being tactful. Thus, a person who is motivated by love does not want to irritate others; he wants to help them. One who is kind and mild-tempered is gentle in his way of doing things. The person who is peaceable seeks ways to promote good relations with others. Even when people are abrasive in their manner, an individual who is long-suffering remains calm.—Gal. 5:22, 23.

Regardless of how the Bible’s message is presented, however, some people will take offense at it. Because of the wicked heart condition of the majority of first-century Jews, Jesus Christ became to them “a stone of stumbling and a rock-mass of offense.” (1 Pet. 2:7, 8) In connection with his work of Kingdom proclamation, Jesus said: “I came to start a fire on the earth.” (Luke 12:49) And the message of Jehovah’s Kingdom, which includes the need for humans to recognize the sovereignty of their Creator, continues to be the burning issue that confronts mankind. Many people take offense at the message that God’s Kingdom will soon remove the present wicked system of things. Yet, in obedience to God, we keep on preaching. While doing so, however, we keep in mind the Bible’s counsel: “If possible, as far as it depends upon you, be peaceable with all men.”—Rom. 12:18.

Tactful When Witnessing. There are many circumstances under which we speak to others about our faith. Of course, we do so when in the field ministry, but we also seek appropriate opportunities when with relatives, workmates, and schoolmates. In all these settings, tact is needed.

If we present the Kingdom message in such a manner that others feel we are giving them a lecture, they may resent it. When they have not asked for help and perhaps do not feel the need for it, they may take offense at any implication that they need to be set straight. How can we avoid giving the wrong impression? Learning the art of friendly conversation can help.

Endeavor to begin the conversation by bringing up a subject that is of interest to the other person. If that person is a relative, a coworker, or a schoolmate, you may already know what interests him. Even if you have never met the person before, you might bring up an item that you heard on the news or read in the newspaper. Such subjects usually reflect what is on the minds of many people. When you are working from house to house, be observant. Home decorations, toys in the yard, religious items, and bumper stickers on a car parked in the driveway may provide further indications as to the interests of the householder. When the householder comes to the door, listen as he expresses

118

himself. What he says will either confirm or correct your conclusions about his interests and viewpoint and will provide further indications of what you need to consider in order to give a witness.

As the conversation unfolds, share points from the Bible and Bible-based literature that have a bearing on the subject. But do not dominate the conversation. (Eccl. 3:7) Involve your householder in the discussion if he is willing to share. Be interested in his views and opinions. These may provide the clues you need in order to be tactful.

Before you say things, consider how they will sound to the other person. Proverbs 12:8 commends a “mouth of discretion.” The Hebrew expression used here is associated with such concepts as insight and prudence. Thus, discretion involves cautious reserve in speech as a result of thinking a matter through so as to act wisely. Verse 18 of that same chapter of Proverbs warns against “speaking thoughtlessly as with the stabs of a sword.” It is possible to uphold Bible truth without being offensive.

Simply showing discernment in your choice of terms may help you to avoid raising a barrier needlessly. If use of the term “the Bible” raises a mental barrier, you might use an expression such as “holy writings” or “a book that is now published in more than 2,000 languages.” If you do refer to the Bible, you might ask the person his opinion of it and then take his comments into account during the rest of your conversation.

Being tactful often involves determining the right time to say things. (Prov. 25:11) You may not agree with all that the other person says, but there is no need to take issue with every unscriptural view he expresses. Do not try to tell the householder everything at once. Jesus told his disciples: “I have many things yet to say to you, but you are not able to bear them at present.”—John 16:12.

When possible, sincerely commend those to whom you speak. Even when the householder is argumentative, you may still be able to commend him for holding a certain viewpoint. The apostle Paul did this when speaking to the philosophers at the Areopagus in Athens. Philosophers were “conversing with him controversially.” How could he make his point without giving offense? Earlier he observed the many altars they had made to their gods. Instead of condemning the Athenians for their idolatrous worship, he tactfully commended them for their strong religious feelings. He said: “I behold that in all things you seem to be more given to the fear of the deities than others are.” This approach opened the way for him to present his message concerning the true God. As a result, some became believers.—Acts 17:18, 22, 34.

Do not overreact when objections are raised. Keep calm. View these as opportunities to gain some insight into the person’s thinking. You might thank him for expressing his views. What if he abruptly says: “I have my own religion”? You might in a tactful way ask: “Have you been a religious person all your life?” Then, after he responds, add: “Do you think mankind will ever be united in one religion?” This may open the way for further conversation.

Having a proper view of ourselves can help us to be tactful. We are firmly convinced of the rightness of Jehovah’s ways and the truthfulness of his Word. We speak with conviction regarding these things. But there is no reason for us to be self-righteous. (Eccl. 7:15, 16) We are grateful to know the truth and to enjoy Jehovah’s blessing, but we well know that our having his approval is a result of his undeserved kindness and our faith in Christ, not a result of our own righteousness. (Eph. 2:8, 9) We recognize the need to ‘keep testing whether we are in the faith, to keep proving what we ourselves are.’ (2 Cor. 13:5) So when we speak to people about the need to conform to God’s requirements, we humbly apply the Bible’s counsel to ourselves too. It is not our place to sit in judgment of our fellowman. Jehovah “has committed all the judging to the Son,” and it is before his judgment seat that we must answer for what we do.—John 5:22; 2 Cor. 5:10.

119

*** be study 48 p. 251 p. 254 Reasoning Manner *** Study 48 Reasoning Manner


Use scriptures, illustrations, and questions in a logical way and in a manner that encourages people to listen and to think.


A blunt, dogmatic approach tends to close minds and hearts. A reasoning manner encourages discussion, gives people something to think about later, and leaves the way open for future conversations. It can be powerfully persuasive.

WE ARE grateful for the changes that God’s Word has brought about in our lives, and we want others to benefit as well. Furthermore, we realize that how people respond to the good news will affect their future prospects. (Matt. 7:13, 14; John 12:48) We earnestly want them to accept the truth. However, our strong convictions and zeal need to be coupled with discernment in order to accomplish the most good.

A blunt statement of truth that exposes as false a cherished belief of another person, even when buttressed with the recitation of a long list of Scripture texts, is generally not well received. For example, if popular celebrations are simply denounced as being of pagan origin, this may not change how other people feel about them. A reasoning approach is usually more successful. What is involved in being reasonable?

The Scriptures tell us that “the wisdom from above is . . . peaceable, reasonable.” (Jas. 3:17) The Greek word here rendered “reasonable” literally means “yielding.” Some translations render it “considerate,” “gentle,” or “forbearing.” Notice that reasonableness is associated with peaceableness. At Titus 3:2, it is mentioned along with mildness and is contrasted with belligerence. Philippians 4:5 urges us to be known for our “reasonableness.” A person who is reasonable takes into account the background, circumstances, and feelings of the one to whom he is talking. He is willing to yield when it is appropriate to do so. Dealing with others in such a way helps to open their minds and hearts so that they are more receptive when we reason with them from the Scriptures.

Where to Begin. The historian Luke reports that when the apostle Paul was in Thessalonica, he used the Scriptures, “explaining and proving by references that it was necessary for the Christ to suffer and to rise from the dead.” (Acts 17:2, 3) It is noteworthy that Paul did this in a Jewish synagogue. Those to whom he was speaking recognized the Hebrew Scriptures as an authority. It was appropriate to start with something that they accepted.

When Paul was speaking to Greeks at the Areopagus in Athens, he did not begin with references to the Scriptures. Instead, he started with things that they knew and accepted, and he used these to lead them to a consideration of the Creator and His purposes.—Acts 17:22-31.

In modern times, there are billions who do not recognize the Bible as an authority in their lives. But the life of nearly everyone is affected by harsh situations in the present system of things. People long for something better. If you first show concern for what disturbs them and then show how the Bible explains it, such a reasonable approach might move them to listen to what the Bible says about God’s purpose for humankind.

120

It may be that the heritage passed on to a Bible student by his parents included certain religious beliefs and customs. Now, the student learns that those beliefs and customs are not pleasing to God, and he rejects them in favor of what is taught in the Bible. How can the student explain that decision to his parents? They may feel that by rejecting the religious heritage they gave him, he is rejecting them. The Bible student may conclude that before trying to explain from the Bible the basis for his decision, he will need to reassure his parents of his love and respect for them.

When to Yield. Jehovah himself, though having full authority to command, shows outstanding reasonableness. When rescuing Lot and his family from Sodom, Jehovah’s angels urged: “Escape to the mountainous region for fear you may be swept away!” Yet, Lot pleaded: “Not that, please, Jehovah!” He begged to be permitted to flee to Zoar. Jehovah showed consideration for Lot by allowing him to do that; so when other cities were destroyed, Zoar was spared. Later, however, Lot followed Jehovah’s original direction and moved to the mountainous region. (Gen. 19:17-30) Jehovah knew that his way was right, but he patiently showed consideration while Lot came to appreciate it.

In order to deal successfully with others, we too need to be reasonable. We may be convinced that the other person is wrong, and we may have in mind powerful arguments that would prove it. But at times it is better not to press the matter. Reasonableness does not mean compromising Jehovah’s standards. It may simply be better to thank the other person for expressing himself or to let some wrong statements pass unchallenged so that you can focus the discussion on something that will accomplish more good. Even if he condemns what you believe, do not overreact. You might ask him why he feels as he does. Listen carefully to his reply. This will give you insight into his thinking. It may also lay the groundwork for constructive conversation at a future time.—Prov. 16:23; 19:11.

Jehovah has endowed humans with the ability to choose. He allows them to use that ability, even though they may not use it wisely. As Jehovah’s spokesman, Joshua recounted God’s dealings with Israel. But then he said: “Now if it is bad in your eyes to serve Jehovah, choose for yourselves today whom you will serve, whether the gods that your forefathers who were on the other side of the River served or the gods of the Amorites in whose land you are dwelling. But as for me and my household, we shall serve Jehovah.” (Josh. 24:15) Our assignment today is to give “a witness,” and we speak with conviction, but we do not try to pressure others to believe. (Matt. 24:14) They must choose, and we do not deny them that right.

Ask Questions. Jesus set an outstanding example in reasoning with people. He took into account their background and used illustrations that they would readily accept. He also made effective use of questions. This gave others opportunity to express themselves and revealed what was in their hearts. It also encouraged them to reason on the matter being considered.

A man versed in the Law asked Jesus: “Teacher, by doing what shall I inherit everlasting life?” Jesus could easily have given him the answer. But he invited the man to express himself. “What is written in the Law? How do you read?” The man answered correctly. Did his giving a correct answer end that discussion? Not at all. Jesus let the man continue, and a question that the man himself asked indicated that he was trying to prove himself righteous. He asked: “Who really is my neighbor?” Rather than give a definition, which the man might have disputed because of the prevailing Jewish attitude toward Gentiles and Samaritans, Jesus invited him to reason on an illustration. It was about a neighborly Samaritan who came to the aid of a traveler that had been robbed and beaten, whereas a priest and a Levite did not. With a simple question, Jesus made sure that the man got the point. Jesus’ manner of reasoning made the expression “neighbor” take on a meaning that this man had never before discerned. (Luke 10:25-37) What a fine example to imitate! Instead of doing all the talking yourself, in effect, thinking for your householder, learn how to use tactful questions and illustrations to encourage your listener to think.

121

Give Reasons. When the apostle Paul spoke in the synagogue in Thessalonica, he did more than read from an authority that his audience accepted. Luke reports that Paul explained, proved, and made application of what he read. As a result, “some of them became believers and associated themselves with Paul and Silas.”—Acts 17:1-4.

Regardless of who may be in your audience, such a reasoning approach can be beneficial. That is true when you witness to relatives, speak to workmates or schoolmates, talk to strangers in your public witnessing, conduct a Bible study, or give a talk in the congregation. When you read a scripture, the meaning may be plain to you but perhaps not so to someone else. Your explanation or your application may sound like dogmatic assertion. Would isolating and explaining certain key expressions in the scripture help? Could you present supporting evidence, possibly from the context or from another scripture that deals with the subject? Might an illustration demonstrate the reasonableness of what you have said? Would questions help your audience to reason on the matter? Such a reasoning approach leaves a favorable impression and gives others much to think about.

HOW TO DO IT

When deciding how to begin your discussion, take into account the background and attitude of your listeners.

Do not challenge every wrong statement.

Speak with conviction, but recognize that others have the freedom to choose what they will believe, just as you do.

Instead of answering questions quickly, use other questions or illustrations to help the inquirer to reason on the matter.

Make it a habit to reason on a scripture by explaining key expressions, showing how the context or other scriptures shed light on the meaning, or using an example to show how the scripture applies.

EXERCISES: (1) After you witness to someone who has strong views, analyze the way that you handled the discussion. What evidence did you present? What illustration did you include? What questions did you use? How did you show consideration for his background or feelings? If unable to do this in the field service, try it in a practice session with another publisher. (2) Rehearse how you would reason with someone (a peer or a child) who has in mind doing something that is wrong.

122

*** be p. 272 p. 281 The Message We Must Proclaim *** The Message We Must Proclaim

Jehovah has given us a responsibility and a great privilege, saying: “You are my witnesses, . . . and I am God.” (Isa. 43:12) We are not simply believers. We are witnesses who publicly testify to vital truths contained in God’s inspired Word. What is the message that Jehovah has commissioned us to deliver in our day? It focuses attention on Jehovah God, Jesus Christ, and the Messianic Kingdom.

“FEAR THE TRUE GOD AND KEEP HIS COMMANDMENTS”

LONG before the Christian era, Jehovah told faithful Abraham about a provision for “all nations of the earth” to bless themselves. (Gen. 22:18) He also inspired Solomon to write regarding a fundamental requirement that rests on all humans: “Fear the true God and keep his commandments. For this is the whole obligation of man.” (Eccl. 12:13) But how would the people living in all nations learn about these things?

Although there have always been some people who believed God’s word, the Bible indicates that the intensive global witness that would actually reach all nations with the good news was reserved for “the Lord’s day.” This began in 1914. (Rev. 1:10) Concerning this time, Revelation 14:6, 7 foretold that a vital proclamation under angelic direction would be made “to every nation and tribe and tongue and people.” They would be urged: “Fear God and give him glory, because the hour of the judgment by him has arrived, and so worship the One who made the heaven and the earth and sea and fountains of waters.” It is God’s will that this message be delivered. We have the privilege of sharing in that work.

“The True God.” When Jehovah declared, “You are my witnesses,” it was in a setting where the issue of Godship was being debated. (Isa. 43:10) The message that must be delivered is not merely that people should have a religion or believe in a god. Rather, they need to be given the opportunity to learn that the Creator of heaven and earth is the only true God. (Isa. 45:5, 18, 21, 22; John 17:3) Only the true God can reliably foretell the future. It is our privilege to point out that the fulfillment of Jehovah’s word in the past gives sound basis for confidence that everything he has promised for the future will come true.—Josh. 23:14; Isa. 55:10, 11.

Of course, many to whom we witness worship other gods or claim to worship no god at all. In order to gain a hearing ear, we may need to begin with something of mutual interest. We can benefit from the example recorded at Acts 17:22-31. Notice that although the apostle Paul was tactful, he clearly stated the accountability of all people to the God who is Creator of heaven and earth.

Making Known God’s Name. Do not fail to identify the true God by name. Jehovah loves his name. (Ex. 3:15; Isa. 42:8) He wants people to know that name. He caused his illustrious name to be included in the Bible more than 7,000 times. It is our responsibility to acquaint people with it.—Deut. 4:35.

The future life prospects of all humankind depend on their knowing Jehovah and calling on him in faith. (Joel 2:32; Mal. 3:16; 2 Thess. 1:8) Yet, most people do not know Jehovah. That includes large numbers who profess to worship the God of the Bible. Even if they have a Bible and read it, they still may not know God’s personal name because it has been removed from many modern translations. The only acquaintance that some people have with the name Jehovah is that their religious leaders have told them not to use it.

How might we acquaint people with God’s name? Nothing is quite as effective as showing it to them in the Bible—their own copy if possible. In some translations, that name appears thousands of times. In others, it may appear only at Psalm 83:18 or Exodus 6:3-6, or it may be found in a footnote on Exodus 3:14, 15 or 6:3. In a number of translations, substitute expressions, such as “Lord” and “God,” are set in distinctive type when the original-language text contains the personal name of God. Where modern translators have omitted God’s personal name entirely, you may need to use an older Bible

123

translation to show people what has been done. In some lands you might point out the divine name in religious hymns or in an inscription on a public building.

Even for those who worship other gods, Jeremiah 10:10-13 in the New World Translation can be used effectively. It not only states the name of God but also clearly explains who he is.

Do not hide the name Jehovah behind such labels as “God” and “Lord,” as Christendom does. This does not mean that the name has to be used at the beginning of every conversation. Because of prejudice, some people would cut off the discussion. But after establishing a basis for conversation, do not shy away from using the divine name.

It is noteworthy that the Bible uses the personal name of God more often than the combined number of times that it uses such designations as “Lord” and “God.” Even so, Bible writers did not try to include the divine name in every sentence. They simply did it naturally, freely, and respectfully. That is a good pattern to follow.

The Person Identified by the Name. Although the fact that God has a personal name is in itself a profound truth, that is only the beginning.

In order to love Jehovah and call on him in faith, people need to know the kind of God he is. When Jehovah made his name known to Moses on Mount Sinai, He did much more than just repeat the word “Jehovah.” He drew attention to some of His outstanding qualities. (Ex. 34:6, 7) That is an example for us to imitate.

Whether you are witnessing to newly interested people or giving talks in the congregation, when you speak about the blessings of the Kingdom, point out what these indicate about the God who makes such promises. When referring to his commandments, emphasize the wisdom and the love that they reflect. Make clear that God’s requirements do not impose a hardship on us but, rather, are designed to benefit us. (Isa. 48:17, 18; Mic. 6:8) Show how each of Jehovah’s expressions of power reveals something about his personality, his standards, his purpose. Draw attention to the balance shown in the way that Jehovah manifests his qualities. Let people hear you express your own feelings about Jehovah. Your love for Jehovah can help to stir up such love in others.

The urgent message for our day calls on all people to fear God. By what we say, we should seek to build up such godly fear. This fear is a wholesome fear, an awe of Jehovah, a profound reverence for him. (Ps. 89:7) It includes an awareness that Jehovah is the supreme Judge and that our future life prospects depend on our having his approval. (Luke 12:5; Rom. 14:12) Such fear, therefore, is intertwined with deep love for him and, consequently, an intense desire to please him. (Deut. 10:12, 13) Godly fear also moves us to hate what is bad, to obey God’s commandments, and to worship him with a complete heart. (Deut. 5:29; 1 Chron. 28:9; Prov. 8:13) It safeguards us against trying to serve God while loving things of the world.—1 John 2:15-17.

God’s Name—“A Strong Tower.” People who truly come to know Jehovah enjoy great protection. This is not simply because they use his personal name or can list some of his qualities. It is because they put their trust in Jehovah himself. Regarding them, Proverbs 18:10 states: “The name of Jehovah is a strong tower. Into it the righteous runs and is given protection.”

Make good use of opportunities to urge others to trust in Jehovah. (Ps. 37:3; Prov. 3:5, 6) Such trust shows faith in Jehovah and his promises. (Heb. 11:6) When people ‘call on the name of Jehovah’ because they know that he is the Universal Sovereign, love his ways, and fully believe that true salvation can come only from him, then—God’s Word assures us—they will be saved. (Rom. 10:13, 14) As you teach others, help them to build up that sort of faith in connection with every aspect of life.

Many people face overwhelming personal problems. They may not see a way out. Urge them to learn Jehovah’s ways, to trust in him, and to apply what they learn. (Ps. 25:5) Encourage them to pray earnestly for God’s help and to thank him for his blessings. (Phil. 4:6, 7) When they come to know Jehovah, not simply by reading certain statements in the Bible but also

124

by experiencing the fulfillment of his promises in their own lives, they will begin to enjoy the security that comes with truly appreciating what the name of Jehovah represents.—Ps. 34:8; Jer. 17:7, 8.

Use well every opportunity to help people to appreciate the wisdom of fearing the true God, Jehovah, and keeping his commandments.

“BEARING WITNESS TO JESUS”

AFTER his resurrection and before his return to heaven, Jesus Christ gave instructions to his disciples, saying: “You will be witnesses of me . . . to the most distant part of the earth.” (Acts 1:8) Loyal servants of God in our day are described as those who “have the work of bearing witness to Jesus.” (Rev. 12:17) How diligent are you about giving that witness?

Many people who sincerely say that they believe in Jesus know nothing of his prehuman existence. They do not realize that he truly was human when on earth. They do not comprehend what is meant by his being the Son of God. They know very little about his role in the fulfillment of God’s purpose. They do not know what he is doing now, and they do not realize how their lives will be affected by what he does in the future. They may even mistakenly think that Jehovah’s Witnesses do not believe in Jesus. It is our privilege to endeavor to make known the truth about these matters.

Still other people do not believe that anyone like the Jesus described in the Bible really lived. Some view Jesus merely as a great man. Many reject the idea that he is God’s Son. “Bearing witness to Jesus” among such people requires much effort, patience, and tactfulness.

Regardless of the viewpoint of your listeners, they need to take in knowledge of Jesus Christ if they are to avail themselves of God’s provision for eternal life. (John 17:3) God’s clearly expressed will is that all who live must “openly acknowledge that Jesus Christ is Lord” and must submit to his authority. (Phil. 2:9-11) Thus, we cannot simply avoid the issue when we encounter people who have strong but wrong opinions or outright prejudice. Whereas in some cases we can speak freely about Jesus Christ—even on our initial visit—in others, we may need to make discreet comments that help our listeners to begin thinking correctly about him. We may also need to think of ways to introduce additional aspects of the subject on future visits. However, it may not be possible to discuss all that is involved until we conduct a home Bible study with a person.—1 Tim. 2:3-7.

Jesus’ Vital Place in God’s Purpose. We need to help people appreciate that since Jesus is “the way” and ‘no one comes to the Father except through him,’ it is impossible to have an approved relationship with God without faith in Jesus Christ. (John 14:6) Unless a person realizes the vital role that Jehovah has assigned to his firstborn Son, it is impossible to understand the Bible. Why? Because Jehovah made this Son the key figure in the outworking of all His purposes. (Col. 1:17-20) Bible prophecy revolves around this fact. (Rev. 19:10) Jesus Christ is the one through whom the solution is provided for all the problems raised by Satan’s rebellion and the sin of Adam.—Heb. 2:5-9, 14, 15.

To appreciate Christ’s role, a person must recognize that humans are in a lamentable condition from which they cannot free themselves. All of us are born in sin. This may affect us in various ways during our lifetime. Sooner or later, however, it results in death. (Rom. 3:23; 5:12) Reason on that fact with those to whom you witness. Then point out that through the ransom sacrifice of Jesus Christ, Jehovah has lovingly made deliverance from sin and death possible for those who exercise faith in that provision. (Mark 10:45; Heb. 2:9) This opens the way for them to enjoy everlasting life in perfection. (John 3:16, 36) It is not possible in any other way. (Acts 4:12) As a teacher, whether in private or in the congregation, do more than simply state these facts. Kindly and patiently build in your listeners a feeling of gratitude for Christ’s role as our Redeemer. Appreciation for this provision can have a profound effect on a person’s attitude, conduct, and goals in life.—2 Cor. 5:14, 15.

Of course, Jesus laid down his life in sacrifice just once. (Heb. 9:28) However, he is actively serving as High Priest now. Help others to understand what that means. Are they experiencing stress, disappointment, suffering, or problems because of unkindness on the part of people around them? When Jesus was a human, he experienced all of these. He knows how

125

we feel. Because of imperfection, do we feel the need for God’s mercy? If we pray to God for forgiveness on the basis of Jesus’ sacrifice, Jesus acts as “a helper with the Father.” Compassionately, he “pleads for us.” (1 John 2:1, 2; Rom. 8:34) On the basis of Jesus’ sacrifice and through his services as High Priest, we are able to approach Jehovah’s “throne of undeserved kindness” to receive help at the right time. (Heb. 4:15, 16) Though we are imperfect, the help that Jesus provides as High Priest enables us to serve God with a clean conscience.—Heb. 9:13, 14.

Additionally, Jesus exercises great authority as the one designated by God to be Head of the Christian congregation. (Matt. 28:18; Eph. 1:22, 23) As such, he provides needed direction in harmony with God’s will. When you teach others, help them to appreciate that Jesus Christ, and no human, is the Head of the congregation. (Matt. 23:10) From your initial contact with interested ones, invite them to meetings of the local congregation, where we study the Bible with the help of material provided through “the faithful and discreet slave.” Explain to them not only who the “slave” is but also who the Master is so that they become aware of Jesus’ headship. (Matt. 24:45-47) Introduce them to the elders, and explain the Scriptural qualifications that these must meet. (1 Tim. 3:1-7; Titus 1:5-9) Point out that the congregation does not belong to the elders but that they help us to walk in the footsteps of Jesus Christ. (Acts 20:28; Eph. 4:16; 1 Pet. 5:2, 3) Help these interested ones see that there is an organized, worldwide society operating under Christ’s headship.

From the Gospels, we learn that when Jesus entered Jerusalem shortly before his death, his disciples hailed him as “the One coming as the King in Jehovah’s name!” (Luke 19:38) As people study the Bible more deeply, they learn that Jehovah has now invested Jesus with ruling authority that affects people of all nations. (Dan. 7:13, 14) When you give talks in the congregation or conduct studies, build appreciation for what Jesus’ rulership should mean to all of us.

Emphasize that our way of life shows whether we really believe that Jesus Christ is King and whether we willingly submit to his rulership. Highlight the work that Jesus, after being anointed as King, assigned his followers to do. (Matt. 24:14; 28:18-20) Discuss what Jesus, the Wonderful Counselor, said regarding priorities in life. (Isa. 9:6, 7; Matt. 6:19-34) Direct attention to the spirit that the Prince of Peace said his followers would manifest. (Matt. 20:25-27; John 13:35) Be careful not to take it upon yourself to judge whether others are doing as much as they should, but encourage them to consider what their actions indicate about their submission to Christ’s kingship. As you do so, acknowledge your need to do the same.

Laying Christ as the Foundation. The Bible likens the work of making a Christian disciple to building a structure upon Jesus Christ as the foundation. (1 Cor. 3:10-15) To accomplish this, help people to know Jesus as he is described in the Bible. Exercise care that they do not look to you as the one they are following. (1 Cor. 3:4-7) Direct their attention to Jesus Christ.

If the foundation has been laid well, students will appreciate that Christ left a model for us “to follow his steps closely.” (1 Pet. 2:21) To build on that, encourage students to read the Gospels not merely as truthful history but as a pattern to be followed. Help them to take to heart the attitudes and qualities that characterized Jesus. Encourage them to observe how Jesus felt about his Father, how he dealt with temptations and trials, how he showed submission to God, and how he dealt with humans under various circumstances. Emphasize the activity with which Jesus filled his life. Then, when faced with decisions and trials in life, a student will ask himself: ‘What would Jesus do in this situation? Will my course show proper appreciation for what he has done for me?’

When you speak before the congregation, do not conclude that since your brothers already have faith in Jesus, there is no need to draw special attention to him. What you say will mean more if you build on that faith. When you speak about meetings, connect this with Jesus’ role as Head of the congregation. When you discuss the field ministry, draw attention to the spirit Jesus showed as he carried on his ministry, and present the ministry in the light of what Christ as King is doing to gather people for preservation into the new world.

It is evident that more is needed than simply learning basic facts about Jesus. To become real Christians, people must exercise faith in him and truly love him. Such love motivates loyal obedience. (John 14:15, 21) It enables people to stand firm in the faith under adversity, to continue to walk in Christ’s footsteps all the days of their life, to prove themselves mature

126

Christians who are firmly “rooted and established on the foundation.” (Eph. 3:17) Such a course brings glory to Jehovah, the God and Father of Jesus Christ.

“THIS GOOD NEWS OF THE KINGDOM”

WHEN providing details regarding the sign of his presence and the conclusion of the system of things, Jesus foretold: “This good news of the kingdom will be preached in all the inhabited earth for a witness to all the nations, and then the end will come.”—Matt. 24:14.

Exactly what is this message that is to be given such wide publicity? It is about the Kingdom for which Jesus taught us to pray to God, saying: “Let your kingdom come.” (Matt. 6:10) Revelation 11:15 describes it as “the kingdom of our Lord [Jehovah] and of his Christ” because the ruling authority originates with Jehovah and is conferred upon Christ as King. Note, however, that the message that Jesus said would be proclaimed in our day goes beyond what his followers preached in the first century. They told people: “The kingdom of God has come near to you.” (Luke 10:9) Jesus, the one anointed to be King, was then in their midst. But as recorded at Matthew 24:14, Jesus foretold the worldwide announcement of another development in the fulfillment of God’s purpose.

The prophet Daniel was given a vision of this development. He saw “someone like a son of man,” Jesus Christ, receiving from “the Ancient of Days,” Jehovah God, “rulership and dignity and kingdom, that the peoples, national groups and languages should all serve even him.” (Dan. 7:13, 14) That event of universal significance took place in heaven in the year 1914. Thereafter, the Devil and his demons were hurled down to the earth. (Rev. 12:7-10) The old system of things had entered its last days. But before it is completely removed, a global proclamation is being made that Jehovah’s Messianic King now rules from his heavenly throne. People everywhere are being put on notice. Their response gives evidence of their attitude toward the Most High as Ruler in “the kingdom of mankind.”—Dan. 4:32.

True, more is yet to come—much more! We still pray, “Let your kingdom come,” but it is not with the idea that the establishment of God’s Kingdom is yet future. Rather, it is with the intent that the heavenly Kingdom will act in a decisive way to fulfill such prophecies as Daniel 2:44 and Revelation 21:2-4. It will transform the earth into a paradise filled with people who love God and their fellowman. As we preach “this good news of the Kingdom,” we point to those future prospects. But we also confidently make known that Jehovah has already conferred full ruling authority on his Son. Are you emphasizing this good news when you witness about the Kingdom?

Explaining the Kingdom. How can we fulfill our commission to announce God’s Kingdom? We may arouse interest by starting conversations on a variety of subjects, but it should soon become clear that our message is about God’s Kingdom.

An important aspect of this work involves reading or quoting scriptures that refer to the Kingdom. When you refer to the Kingdom, be sure that those to whom you speak understand what it is. More may be required than simply saying that God’s Kingdom is a government. Some people may find it difficult to think of something invisible as a government. You might reason with them in various ways. For example, gravity is invisible, but it has a powerful effect on our lives. We cannot see the One who made the law of gravity, but it is obvious that he has great power. The Bible refers to him as “the King of eternity.” (1 Tim. 1:17) Or you might reason that in a large country, many people have never been to the capital or seen their ruler in person. They learn about these through news reports. Likewise, the Bible, published in over 2,200 languages, tells us about God’s Kingdom; it lets us know who has been entrusted with authority and what the Kingdom is doing. The Watchtower, published in more languages than any other periodical, is devoted to “Announcing Jehovah’s Kingdom,” as stated on the front cover.

To help people understand what the Kingdom is, you might mention some of the things that they want governments to provide: economic security, peace, freedom from crime, impartial treatment of all ethnic groups, education, and health care. Show that only by means of God’s Kingdom will these and all other wholesome desires of mankind be fully satisfied.—Ps. 145:16.

127

Endeavor to stimulate a desire on the part of people to be subjects of the Kingdom, in which Jesus Christ rules as King. Point to the miracles he performed as previews of what he will do as heavenly King. Speak often of the appealing qualities he manifested. (Matt. 8:2, 3; 11:28-30) Explain that he laid down his life for us and that God thereafter raised him to immortal life in the heavens. It is from there that he rules as King.—Acts 2:29-35.

Emphasize that God’s Kingdom is now ruling from the heavens. Realize, however, that most people do not see the conditions that they think would be evidence of such rule. Acknowledge that, and ask if they know what Jesus Christ said would be evidence of it. Highlight some of the features of the composite sign found in Matthew chapter 24, Mark chapter 13, or Luke chapter 21. Then ask why Christ’s enthronement in heaven would lead to such conditions on earth. Direct attention to Revelation 12:7-10, 12.

As tangible evidence of what God’s Kingdom is doing, read Matthew 24:14, and describe the global program of Bible education that is taking place now. (Isa. 54:13) Tell people about the various schools from which Jehovah’s Witnesses benefit—all based on the Bible, all held free of charge. Explain that in addition to our house-to-house ministry, we offer free home instruction in the Bible to individuals and families in over 230 lands. What human government is in a position to provide such an extensive educational program not only for its subjects but for people earth wide? Invite people to come to the Kingdom Hall, to attend assemblies and conventions of Jehovah’s Witnesses, to see evidence of how such education is affecting the lives of people.—Isa. 2:2-4; 32:1, 17; John 13:35.

But will the householder realize how his own life is affected? You might tactfully point out that the purpose of your visit is to discuss the opportunity that is open to all to choose life as subjects of God’s Kingdom. How? By learning what God requires and living in harmony with it now.—Deut. 30:19, 20; Rev. 22:17.

Helping Others Put the Kingdom First. Even after a person accepts the Kingdom message, there are decisions that he must make. What priority will he give God’s Kingdom in his own life? Jesus urged his disciples to “keep on . . . seeking first the kingdom.” (Matt. 6:33) How can we help fellow Christians to do that? By setting a good example ourselves and by discussing opportunities that are available. At times, by asking whether a person has considered certain possibilities and by sharing experiences to show what others are doing. By discussing Bible accounts in such a way that these deepen one’s love for Jehovah. By stressing the reality of the Kingdom. By emphasizing how important the work of Kingdom proclamation really is. The greatest good is often done, not by telling people what needs to be done, but by stimulating in them a desire to do it.

Without a doubt, the vital message that all of us must proclaim focuses primary attention on Jehovah God, Jesus Christ, and the Kingdom. The vital truths regarding these should be emphasized in our public witnessing, in our congregations, and in our personal lives. When we do that, we demonstrate that we are truly benefiting from our Theocratic Ministry School education.

ALL PEOPLE NEED TO HEAR . . .

That Jehovah is the Creator of heaven and earth.

That Jehovah is the only true God.

That Jehovah is a God of outstanding love, superlative wisdom, complete justice, and almighty power.

That we are accountable to Jehovah for what we do.

OUR WORSHIP OF JEHOVAH . . .

Should be motivated by love for him.

Should come from a complete heart, not a heart that also loves the things in the world.

128

Should give evidence of how precious to us is an approved relationship with him.

HELP PEOPLE TO UNDERSTAND . . .

That an approved relationship with God is possible only through Jesus Christ.

That deliverance from sin and death is possible only through faith in Jesus Christ.

That God’s will is for all to acknowledge Jesus as Lord, not merely by calling him Lord but by keeping his commandments.

That what the Bible says about Jesus Christ is true but that much of what Christendom teaches about him distorts the facts.

ASK YOURSELF:

Do I give evidence that I clearly discern the role of Jesus Christ as the appointed Head of the congregation?

Is appreciation for the sacrifice of Christ as powerful a motivating factor in my life as it should be?

How can I bring my actions and attitudes more fully into harmony with the example set by the Son of God?

LET PEOPLE HEAR . . .

That God’s Kingdom now rules from the heavens and will soon replace all human rulership.

That the Kingdom will transform the earth into a paradise filled with people who love God and their fellowman.

That only by means of the Kingdom will the wholesome desires of all humans be fully satisfied.

That by what we do now we show whether we want to be subjects of God’s Kingdom.

ASK YOURSELF:

Does my way of life show that I seek first the Kingdom?

Are there adjustments that I can make in order to do this more fully?

What can I do to stimulate in others a desire to seek first the Kingdom?

129

*** rs p. 9 Introductions for Use in the Field Ministry ***

Introductions for Use in the Field Ministry

Comments: In determining the kind of introduction to use when you share in the field ministry, three things deserve careful consideration: (1) The message that we are commissioned to deliver is “this good news of the kingdom.” (Matt. 24:14) Even when we are not discussing it directly, we should have in mind helping people to see the need for it, or perhaps clearing out of the way obstacles to their being willing to consider it. (2) Genuine concern for the welfare of the people we meet will help us, as it did Jesus, to reach hearts. (Mark 6:34) Such genuine interest may be indicated by a warm smile and a friendly manner, willingness to listen when they speak and then adapting our remarks accordingly, also by our use of questions that encourage them to express themselves so we can better understand their viewpoint. First Corinthians 9:19-23 shows that the apostle Paul adapted his presentation of the good news to the circumstances of the people to whom he spoke. (3) In some parts of the world, visitors are expected to observe certain formalities before stating the reason they are calling. Elsewhere the householder may expect an uninvited visitor to get to the point quickly.—Compare Luke 10:5.

The following introductions show how some experienced Witnesses begin conversations. If the introductions you are now using seldom open the way for conversations, try some of these suggestions. When you do so, you will no doubt want to put them in your own words. Also, you will find it helpful to get suggestions from other Witnesses in your congregation who have good success in approaching people.

ARMAGEDDON

● ‘Many people are concerned about Armageddon. They have heard world leaders use that term with reference to all-out nuclear war. What do you believe Armageddon will mean to mankind? . . . Actually, the name Armageddon is taken from the Bible, and it means something quite different from what the word is commonly used to express. (Rev. 16:14, 16) The Bible also shows that there are things we personally can do with a view to survival. (Zeph. 2:2, 3)’ (See also pages 44-49, under the main heading “Armageddon.”)

BIBLE/GOD

● ‘Hello. I’m making just a brief call to share an important message with you. Please note what it says here in the Bible. (Read scripture, such as Revelation 21:3, 4.) What do you think about that? Does it sound good to you?’

● ‘We’re talking to our neighbors about where to find practical help to cope with problems of life. In the past, many people consulted the Bible. But we live in a time when attitudes are changing. How do you feel about it? Do you believe that the Bible is God’s Word or do you feel that it is just a good book written by men? . . . If it is from God, how do you think a person can be sure of that?’ (See pages 58-68, under the main heading “Bible.”)

● ‘I’m glad to find you at home. I’m sharing with my neighbors an encouraging thought from the Bible (or, the Holy Scriptures). Have you ever wondered: . . . ? (Ask a question that leads into your topic for discussion.)’

● ‘We’re encouraging folks to read their Bible. The answers that it gives to important questions often surprise people. For example: . . . (Ps. 104:5; or Dan. 2:44; or some other).’

● ‘We’re making just a brief visit on our neighbors today. Some people to whom we talk have confidence in God. Others find it difficult to believe in him. How do you feel? . . . The Bible encourages us to consider the significance of the physical universe. (Ps. 19:1) The One whose laws govern these heavenly bodies has also provided valuable direction for us. (Ps. 19:7-9)’ (See also pages 145-151, 84-88, under the main headings “God” and “Creation.”)

130

CRIME/SAFETY

● ‘Hello. We’re talking with folks about the matter of personal safety. There is a lot of crime around us, and it affects our lives. Do you think the time will come when people like you and me will be able to walk the streets at night and feel safe? (Or, Do you feel that anyone has a real solution to the problem?) . . . (Prov. 15:3; Ps. 37:10, 11)’

● ‘My name is ——. I live in the neighborhood. As I was coming along this morning, I observed that everyone is talking about (mention a recent neighborhood crime or other matter of local concern). What do you think about it? . . . Is there anything that you feel would help to make our lives more secure? . . . (Prov. 1:33; 3:5, 6)’

CURRENT EVENTS

● ‘Good evening. My name is ——. I’m a neighbor from (name street or area). Did you see the TV news last night? . . . That report on (mention some current item of concern)—what do you think about it? . . . It is not unusual to hear people ask, What is this world coming to? We as Jehovah’s Witnesses believe that we are living in what the Bible calls “the last days.” Notice this detailed description at 2 Timothy 3:1-5.’ (See also pages 234-243.)

● ‘Did you read this in the newspaper this week? (Show appropriate clipping.) What do you think . . . ?’

● ‘I’d like to ask you a question. If you could choose, which of the many problems now facing the world would you like to see corrected first? (After learning what is of greatest concern to the householder, use this as the basis for your discussion.)’

EMPLOYMENT/HOUSING

● ‘We’ve been talking with your neighbors about what can be done to assure that there will be employment and housing for everyone. Do you believe that it is reasonable to expect that human governments will accomplish this? . . . But there is someone who knows how to solve these problems; that is mankind’s Creator. (Isa. 65:21-23)’

● ‘We are sharing with our neighbors a thought about good government. Most people would like to have the kind of government that is free from corruption, one that provides employment and good housing for everyone. What kind of government do you think can do all of that? . . . (Ps. 97:1, 2; Isa. 65:21-23)’ (See also pages 152-156, under the main heading “Government.”)

FAMILY/CHILDREN

● ‘We’re talking to folks who are interested in how we can better cope with the problems of family life. We all try to do the best we can, but if there is something that can help us to have greater success, we’re interested, aren’t we? . . . (Col. 3:12, 18-21) The Bible sets before us a hope that offers a real future for our families. (Rev. 21:3, 4)’

● ‘We all want our children to have happy lives. But do you think there is sound reason to expect a happy outcome for the trouble the world is in today? . . . So, what kind of world do you think our children are going to face when they grow up? . . . The Bible shows that God is going to make this earth a wonderful place in which to live. (Ps. 37:10, 11) But whether our children will share in it may depend to a large extent on the choice we make. (Deut. 30:19)’

FUTURE/SECURITY

● ‘Good morning. How are you? . . . We’re endeavoring to share with our neighbors a positive view of the future. Is that the way you try to look at life? . . . Do you find that some situations make this hard to do? . . . I have found that

131

the Bible is very helpful in this respect. It realistically describes the conditions that exist in our day, but it also explains their meaning and tells us what the outcome will be. (Luke 21:28, 31)’

● ‘Hello. My name is ——. What’s yours? . . . I’m encouraging young folks like you to consider the grand future that the Bible holds out to us. (Read scripture, such as Revelation 21:3, 4.) Does that sound good to you?’

HOME BIBLE STUDY

● ‘I’m calling to offer you a free home Bible course. If I may, I’d like to take just a few minutes to demonstrate how people in some 200 lands discuss the Bible at home as family groups. We can use any of these topics as a basis for discussion. (Show the table of contents from study book.) Which one especially interests you?’

● ‘We are showing this Bible study aid to our neighbors. (Show it.) Have you seen it before? . . . If you have just a few minutes, I’d like to demonstrate how it can be used with your own copy of the Bible.’

INJUSTICE/SUFFERING

● ‘Have you ever wondered: Does God really care about the injustice and suffering that humans experience? . . . (Eccl. 4:1; Ps. 72:12-14)’ (See also the main headings “Suffering” and “Encouragement.”)

KINGDOM

● ‘In speaking with my neighbors, I have observed that many long to live under a government that can really solve the big problems that face us today—crime and the high cost of living (or whatever is currently on the minds of many). That would be desirable, don’t you agree? . . . Is there such a government today? . . . Many people have actually prayed for a government that can do those things. No doubt you have prayed for it, but not many people think of it as a government. (Dan. 2:44; Ps. 67:6, 7; Mic. 4:4)’ (See also pages 225-234 and 152-156, under the main headings “Kingdom” and “Government.”)

● ‘We are asking our neighbors a question. We’d appreciate your comment on it. You know, Jesus taught us to pray for God’s Kingdom to come and for His will to be done on earth as it is in heaven. Do you think this prayer will ever be answered so that God’s will really will be done here on earth? . . . (Isa. 55:10, 11; Rev. 21:3-5)’

● ‘I’m discussing with my neighbors an issue that we all must face: Do we favor government by God, or do we prefer human rulership? In view of conditions in the world today, do you feel that we need something other than what men have produced? . . . (Matt. 6:9, 10; Ps. 146:3-5)’

LAST DAYS

● ‘We’re calling to discuss the meaning of what’s happening around us in the world today. Among many people there has been a decline in interest in God and in his standards for living as set out in the Bible. This has greatly influenced the attitude of people toward one another. Please let me share with you this description recorded at 2 Timothy 3:1-5 and tell me whether you think it fits the world today. (Read) . . . Is there sound reason to expect better conditions in the future? (2 Pet. 3:13)’

● ‘Many people believe that time is fast running out for this world. They speak of our time as being “the last days.” But did you realize that the Bible tells us how we can survive the end of the present world and live on an earth that will be made a paradise? (Zeph. 2:2, 3)’ (See also pages 234-243, under the main heading “Last Days.”)

See also “Current Events” in this list of suggested introductions.

132

LIFE/HAPPINESS

● ‘We’re visiting our neighbors to find people who are deeply concerned about the meaning of life. Most people experience some happiness. But they face a lot of problems too. As we get up in years, we realize that life is very short. Is this all that life is meant to be? How do you feel about it? . . . (Comment on God’s original purpose as reflected in Eden; then John 17:3 and Revelation 21:3, 4.)’ (See also pages 243-248, under the main heading “Life.”)

● ‘Today we are asking our neighbors what they think when they read in their Bibles the expression “everlasting life.” It is of special interest because that expression appears in the Bible some 40 times. What might such life mean for us? . . . How can we get it? (John 17:3; Rev. 21:4)’

● ‘We’re speaking with people who are truly concerned about the quality of life today. Most of us are glad to be alive, but many wonder, Is a genuinely happy life possible? How do you feel about that? . . . What would you say is one of the biggest obstacles to happiness today? . . . (Ps. 1:1, 2; further texts to fit what concerns the householder)’

LOVE/KINDNESS

● ‘We have found that many people are quite concerned about the lack of real love in the world. Do you feel that way too? . . . Why do you think this is the trend? . . . Did you know that the Bible foretold this situation? (2 Tim. 3:1-4) It also explains the reason for it. (1 John 4:8)’

● ‘My name is ——. I’m one of your neighbors. I’m making just a brief visit to talk with my neighbors about something that concerns me a great deal, and I’m sure you’ve noticed it too. Kindness does not cost much, but it seems to be so rare today. Did you ever wonder why that situation exists? . . . (Matt. 24:12; 1 John 4:8)’

OLD AGE/DEATH

● ‘Have you ever wondered why we grow old and die? Some sea turtles live for hundreds of years. Certain trees have lived for thousands of years. But humans live just 70 or 80 years and then die. Have you wondered why? . . . (Rom. 5:12) Will that situation ever change? . . . (Rev. 21:3, 4)’

● ‘Have you ever asked: Is death the end of it all? Or is there something else after death? . . . The Bible clears up any question we might have about death. (Eccl. 9:5, 10) It also shows that there is a real hope for persons who have faith. (John 11:25)’ (See also pages 98-104 and 118, under the headings “Death” and “Encouragement.”)

WAR/PEACE

● ‘Just about everyone these days is concerned about the threat of nuclear war. Do you think we will ever see real peace on this earth? . . . (Ps. 46:8, 9; Isa. 9:6, 7)’

● ‘I’m looking for people who would like to live in a world free from war. In this century alone there have been hundreds of wars, including two world wars. Now we are faced with the threat of a nuclear conflict. What do you feel is needed if such a war is to be avoided? . . . Who can bring about a peaceful world? . . . (Mic. 4:2-4)’

● ‘We find that just about everyone says he wants world peace. Most of the world leaders also say that. Why, then, is it so hard to attain? . . . (Rev. 12:7-12)’

WHEN MANY PEOPLE SAY: ‘I HAVE MY OWN RELIGION’

● ‘Good morning. We are visiting all the families on your block (or, in this area), and we find that most of them have their own religion. No doubt you do too. . . . But, regardless of our religion, we are affected by many of the same

133

problems—high cost of living, crime, illness—is that not so? . . . Do you feel that there is any real solution to these things? . . . (2 Pet. 3:13; etc.)’

WHEN MANY PEOPLE SAY: ‘I’M BUSY’

● ‘Hello. We’re visiting everyone in this neighborhood with an important message. No doubt you are a busy person, so I’ll be brief.’

● ‘Greetings. My name is ——. The purpose of my coming is to discuss with you blessings of God’s Kingdom and how we can share in them. But I can see that you are busy (or, about to go out). May I leave you with just a brief thought?’

IN TERRITORY OFTEN WORKED

● ‘I’m glad to find you at home. We’re making our weekly visit in the neighborhood, and we have something more to share with you about the wonderful things that God’s Kingdom will do for mankind.’

● ‘Hello. It’s good to see you again. . . . Is everyone in the family in good health? . . . I stopped by to share with you a thought on . . . ’

● ‘Good morning. How are you? . . . I’ve been wanting another opportunity to talk with you. (Then name the specific subject you want to discuss.)’

134

*** rs pp. 1524 How You Might Respond to Potential Conversation Stoppers ***

How You Might Respond to Potential Conversation Stoppers

Comments: The life prospects of people depend on their attitude toward Jehovah God and his Kingdom by Christ Jesus. The message of God’s Kingdom is thrilling, and it points to the only dependable hope for humankind. It is a message that transforms lives. We want everyone to hear it. We realize that only a minority will receive it appreciatively, but we know that people at least need to hear it if they are to make an informed choice. Yet not everyone is willing to listen, and we do not try to force them. But with discernment it is often possible to turn potential conversation stoppers into opportunities for further discussion. Here are examples of what some experienced Witnesses have used in their efforts to search out deserving ones. (Matt. 10:11) Our recommendation is not that you memorize any of these replies but that you get the idea in mind, put it in your own words and express it in a manner that conveys your genuine interest in the person to whom you are speaking. As you do so, you can have confidence that those whose hearts are rightly disposed will listen and respond appreciatively to what Jehovah is doing to draw them to his loving provisions for life.—John 6:44; Acts 16:14.

‘I’M NOT INTERESTED’

● ‘May I ask, Do you mean that you are not interested in the Bible, or is it religion in general that does not interest you? I ask that because we have met many who at one time were religious but no longer go to church because they see much hypocrisy in the churches (or, they feel that religion is just another money-making business; or, they do not approve of religion’s involvement in politics; etc.). The Bible does not approve of such practices either and it provides the only basis on which we can look to the future with confidence.’

● ‘If you mean that you are not interested in another religion, I can understand that. But more than likely you are interested in what kind of future we can expect in view of the threat of nuclear war (or, how we can safeguard our children against drug abuse; or, what can be done about crime so that we won’t have to be afraid to walk the streets; etc.). Can you see any prospect for a real solution?’

● ‘Is that because you already have a religion? . . . Tell me, Do you think we will ever see a time when everyone belongs to the same religion? . . . What seems to stand in the way? . . . For it to be meaningful, what sort of foundation would be needed?’

● ‘I can appreciate that. A few years ago I felt the same way. But I read something in the Bible that helped me to view matters in a different light. (Show the person what it was.)’

● ‘Would you be interested if I could show you from the Bible how you could see your dead loved ones again (or, what the real purpose of life is; or, how it can help us to keep our families united; etc.)?’

● ‘If you mean that you are not interested in buying something, let me put your mind at ease. I’m not engaged in a commercial work. But would you be interested in the opportunity to live on a paradise earth, free from sickness and crime, with neighbors who really love you?’

● ‘Is that your usual reply when Jehovah’s Witnesses call? . . . Have you ever really wondered why we keep calling or what we have to say? . . . Briefly, the reason I came to see you is that I know something that you should know too. Why not listen just this once?’

135

‘I’M NOT INTERESTED IN RELIGION’

● ‘I can understand how you feel. Frankly, the churches are not making this world a safer place to live, are they? . . . May I ask, Have you always felt the way you do now? . . . But do you believe in God?’

● ‘There are a lot of people who share your view. Religion has not really helped them. That is one reason why we are calling—because the churches have not told people the truth about God and his wonderful purpose for mankind.’

● ‘But I am sure that you are interested in your own future. Did you know that the Bible foretold the very conditions that exist in the world today? . . . And it shows what the outcome will be.’

● ‘Have you always felt that way? . . . How do you feel about the future?’

‘I’M NOT INTERESTED IN JEHOVAH’S WITNESSES’

● ‘Many folks tell us that. Have you ever wondered why people like me volunteer to make these calls even though we know that the majority of householders may not welcome us? (Give the gist of Matthew 25:31-33, explaining that a separating of people of all nations is taking place and that their response to the Kingdom message is an important factor in this. Or state the gist of Ezekiel 9:1-11, explaining that, on the basis of people’s reaction to the Kingdom message, everyone is being “marked” either for preservation through the great tribulation or for destruction by God.)’

● ‘I can appreciate that, because I used to feel the same way. But, just to be fair, I decided to listen to one of them. And I found out that I hadn’t been told the truth about them. (Mention a common false accusation and then explain what we believe.)’

● ‘Not long ago I said the same thing to a Witness who called at my door. But before he left I raised a question that I was sure he could not answer. Would you like to know what it was? . . . (As an example: Where did Cain get his wife?)’ (For use by those who really had such an experience.)

● ‘If you are a religious person, I can appreciate that. Your own religion no doubt means much to you. But I think you’ll agree that we are both interested in (name an appropriate topic).’

● ‘Then no doubt you have your own religion. Do you mind my asking which religion it is? . . . We enjoy talking with people of your faith. How do you feel about (mention your topic for discussion)?’

● ‘Yes, I understand. But the reason we are calling is that we are a family that would like to see people live together in peace. We’re sick and tired of the news every night with reports of fighting and suffering. I suppose you are the same. . . . But what can bring the needed change? . . . We’ve found encouragement in the Bible’s promises.’

● ‘I appreciate your letting me know how you feel. Would you mind telling me what there is about us that you don’t like? Is it what we show you from the Bible, or is it our coming to visit you?’

‘I HAVE MY OWN RELIGION’

● ‘Would you mind telling me, Does your religion teach that the time will come when people who love what is right will live on earth forever? . . . That is an appealing thought, isn’t it? . . . It is right here in the Bible. (Ps. 37:29; Matt. 5:5; Rev. 21:4)’

● ‘I agree that in this matter each person must make his own decision. But did you know that God himself is looking for a certain kind of people to be his true worshipers? Notice here at John 4:23, 24. What would it mean to worship God “with truth”? . . . What has God given us to help us to know what is true and what is not? . . . (John 17:17) And notice how important it is to us personally. (John 17:3)’

136

● ‘Have you been a religious person all your life? . . . Do you think mankind will ever be united in one religion? . . . I’ve thought a lot about that because of what is recorded here at Revelation 5:13. . . . What is needed in order for us to fit into this picture?’

● ‘I was hoping to find someone like yourself who has an interest in spiritual things. So many today do not. May I ask how you feel about the Bible’s promise that God will clear out all wickedness and make this earth a place where only people who love righteousness will live? Does that appeal to you?’

● ‘Are you quite active in church affairs? . . . Is the church usually well filled for services these days? . . . Do you find that most members are really showing a sincere desire to apply God’s Word in everyday life? (Or, Do you find that there is unity of thinking among the members as to the solution to the problems that face the world?) We find that personal home Bible instruction helps.’

● ‘Evidently you are satisfied with your religion. But most people are not satisfied with world conditions. Perhaps that is true of you too; is it? . . . What is it all leading up to?’

● ‘Are you a person who enjoys reading the Bible? . . . Do you find time to read it on a regular basis?’

● ‘I appreciate your telling me that. I am sure that you will agree that, no matter what our religious background, we are all very much interested in world peace (or, ways to protect our children against bad influences; or, having a neighborhood in which people really love one another; or, enjoying good relationships with other people, and that can present a challenge when everyone feels under pressure).’

● ‘I’m glad to know that you are religiously inclined. Many people today do not take religion seriously. Some even think there is no God. But, according to what you have been taught, what kind of person do you think of God as being? . . . Notice that the Bible gives us his personal name. (Ex. 6:3; Ps. 83:18)’

● ‘When Jesus sent out his disciples to preach, he told them to go to every part of the earth, so they would meet many people whose religion was different from theirs. (Acts 1:8) But he knew that those hungering and thirsting for righteousness would listen. What is the particular message that he said would be delivered in our day? (Matt. 24:14) What does that Kingdom mean to us?’

‘WE ARE ALREADY CHRISTIANS HERE’

● ‘I’m glad to know that. Then you no doubt know that Jesus himself did a work like this, calling on people in their homes, and he commissioned his disciples to do it too. Are you familiar with the theme of the preaching they did? . . . That’s what we came to talk about today. (Luke 8:1; Dan. 2:44)’

● ‘Then I’m sure you will appreciate the seriousness of what Jesus said here in the Sermon on the Mount. He was being very straightforward but also loving when he said . . . (Matt. 7:21-23) The question that we need to ask ourselves, then, is, How well do I know the will of the heavenly Father? (John 17:3)’

‘I’M BUSY’

● ‘Then I’ll be very brief. I called to share just one important thought with you. (State the gist of your topic for discussion in about two sentences.)’

● ‘All right. I’ll be glad to call at another time, when it is more convenient for you. But before I leave, I’d like to read just one scripture that really gives us something important to think about.’

● ‘I understand. As a mother (or, workingman; or, student) I have a full schedule too. So I’ll be brief. All of us are faced with a serious situation. The Bible shows that we are very near the time when God will destroy the present wicked

137

system of things. But there will be survivors. The question is, What must you and I do to be among them? The Bible answers that question. (Zeph. 2:2, 3)’

● ‘You know, that’s exactly the reason why I’m calling. We’re all busy—so busy that really important things in life sometimes get neglected, isn’t that so? . . . I’ll be very brief, but I’m sure you will be interested in just this one text. (Luke 17:26, 27) None of us want to find ourselves in that situation, so we need to make time in our busy lives to consider what the Bible says. (Make literature offer.)’

● ‘Would it be more convenient if we called back in about half an hour, after we have visited some of your neighbors?’

● ‘Then I won’t keep you. Perhaps I can call another day. But before I leave, I would like to give you the opportunity to obtain this special offer. (Display the offer for the month.) This publication contains a study course that will acquaint you with the Bible’s own answers to such questions as (mention just one or two).’

● ‘I’m sorry that I caught you at an inconvenient moment. As you may know, I am one of Jehovah’s Witnesses. I wanted to share with you an important thought from the Bible. But since you don’t have time to listen right now, I would like to give you this tract, which discusses (name the subject). It won’t take long to read, but you will find it very interesting.’

● ‘That’s not hard for me to understand. There just does not seem to be enough time to get everything done. But have you ever thought how different life might be if you could live forever? I know that may sound strange. But let me show you just one Bible text that explains how such a thing is possible. (John 17:3) So, what we need to do now is to take in this knowledge of God and his Son. That is why we leave this literature.’

‘WHY DO YOU PEOPLE CALL SO OFTEN?’

● ‘Because we believe that we are living in the last days referred to in the Bible. We feel that it is important for all of us to think about what the outcome of present conditions will be. (Mention one or two recent events or current situations.) The question is, What do we need to do if we are to survive the end of this system of things?’

● ‘Because we love God and our neighbors. That is what we all should do, isn’t it?’

‘I AM ALREADY WELL ACQUAINTED WITH YOUR WORK’

● ‘I am very glad to hear that. Do you have a close relative or a friend that is a Witness? . . . May I ask: Do you believe what we teach from the Bible, namely, that we are living in “the last days,” that soon God is going to destroy the wicked, and that this earth will become a paradise in which people can live forever in perfect health among neighbors who really love one another?’

‘WE HAVE NO MONEY’

● ‘We are not soliciting funds. But we are offering a free home Bible study course. One of the subjects that it covers is (use a chapter title from a current publication). May I take a few minutes to show you how it works? It won’t cost you a penny.’

● ‘We’re interested in people, not their money. (Continue with discussion. Show them one of the publications and explain how it can benefit them. If they manifest genuine interest and promise to read it, leave it with them. If appropriate, explain how our worldwide preaching activity is financed.)’

138

WHEN SOMEONE SAYS, ‘I’M A BUDDHIST’

● Do not conclude that the person’s beliefs are the same as those of all other Buddhists. Buddhist teachings are vague and the interpretation varies from one person to another. Japanese Buddhism is quite different from the Buddhism of Southeast Asia. Individuals, too, differ as to their viewpoint. In general, however, the following points may be helpful: (1) Buddhism does not recognize an external God, a personal Creator. But many Buddhists worship images and relics of Buddha. (2) Siddhartha Gautama, who was given the title Buddha, came to be viewed as the religious ideal of his followers, to be imitated by them. He encouraged gaining enlightenment by studying mankind from a human standpoint, also severing the roots of suffering by controlling the mind so as to eliminate all earthly desire. He taught that in this way one might attain to Nirvana, free from the rebirths of transmigration. (3) Buddhists worship their ancestors, because they view these as the source of their life.

Suggestions for conversation: (1) When speaking with Buddhists, emphasize that you are no part of Christendom. (2) Buddhists have respect for “holy books,” and generally they respect the Bible for that reason. Instead of dwelling on Buddhist philosophy, present the positive message of the Bible. Let them know that the Bible is not mere human philosophy but the authoritative Word of mankind’s Creator, Jehovah God. Ask politely if you may show them an interesting point in this holy book, the Bible. (3) Many Buddhists are keenly interested in peace and family life and want to live moral lives. Discussion on any of these matters is often welcomed. (4) Show that the Bible points to a righteous heavenly government over the earth as the real solution to the problems facing mankind. It explains the future of the earth and the wonderful prospect of living forever in an earthly paradise. (5) You might point out that the Bible explains the origin of life, the meaning of life, the condition of the dead and the resurrection hope, the reason for the existence of wickedness. A kindly presentation of the clear truths of God’s Word will find appreciative response in the hearts of sheeplike ones.

The booklet In Search of a Father was prepared especially for the benefit of sincere Buddhists.

WHEN SOMEONE SAYS, ‘I’M A HINDU’

● You ought to be aware that Hindu philosophy is very complex and does not conform to normal logic. You may find it helpful to have the following points in mind: (1) Hinduism teaches that the god Brahman includes three forms—Brahma the Creator, Vishnu the Preserver, and Siva the Destroyer. But Hindus do not think of a personal god with an individual existence. (2) Hindus believe that all natural objects possess a soul that never dies, that the soul experiences a virtually endless cycle of reincarnation, that the forms in which it is reborn are determined by deeds (Karma), that release from this “endless wheel” is possible only by extinguishing all physical desire, and that if this is achieved, the soul will merge with the universal spirit. (3) In general, Hindus respect other religions. Hindus believe that, in spite of the fact that they teach conflicting doctrines, all religions lead to the same truth.

Instead of trying to deal with the complexities of Hindu philosophy, present the satisfying truths found in the Holy Bible. Jehovah’s loving provisions for life are open to people of all kinds, and the clear truths in his Word will reach the hearts of those who hunger and thirst for righteousness. Only the Bible provides a truly well-founded hope for the future; only the Bible gives really satisfying answers to the important questions that face all mankind. Give them opportunity to hear those answers. It is of interest that the Hindu Rig-Veda hymn, 10. 121, is entitled “To the Unknown God.” In some cases you may find it appropriate to refer to this in a manner similar to the apostle Paul’s reference to the altar “To an Unknown God” in Athens. (Acts 17:22, 23) Interestingly, the name of the Hindu god Vishnu, without the digamma, is Ish-nuh, which in Chaldee means “the man Noah.” Point out what the Bible says about the significance of the global Flood in the days of Noah. Those who are distressed by the prospect of endless reincarnations may be helped by the material on pages 320, 321, under the main heading “Reincarnation.”

The booklets The Path of Divine Truth Leading to Liberation and From Kurukshetra to Armageddon—And Your Survival contain information that will be very beneficial to sincere Hindus.

WHEN SOMEONE SAYS, ‘I’M A JEW’

● First, ascertain how the person views himself as a Jew. Few are religious. For many, being Jewish is simply an ethnic designation.

Here are a few points that are beneficial to have in mind: (1) Religious Jews view the pronouncing of God’s name as forbidden. (2) Many Jews think of “the Bible” as a Christian book, but if you refer to “the Hebrew Scriptures,” “the Scriptures,” or “the Torah,” that problem does not arise. (3) Tradition is a central part of their faith and is viewed by many religious Jews as equal in authority with the Scriptures. (4) They may associate Jesus Christ with the brutal persecution experienced by the Jews at the hands of Christendom in the name of Jesus. (5) They frequently believe that God requires the Jews to keep the Sabbath, which belief includes refraining from handling money on that day.

To establish a common ground, you might say: (1) ‘You would no doubt agree that, regardless of our background, we all face many of the same difficulties in today’s world. Do you believe that there will really be a lasting solution to the great problems that face this generation? (Ps. 37:10, 11, 29; Ps. 146:3-5; Dan. 2:44)’ (2) ‘We are no part of Christendom and do not believe in a Trinity but worship the God of Abraham. We are especially interested in the matter of religious truth. Do you mind if I ask how you determine what is true, especially in view of the fact that there are great differences of beliefs among Jewish people? . . . (Deut. 4:2; Isa. 29:13, 14; Ps. 119:160)’ (3) ‘We are keenly interested in God’s promise to Abraham that through his seed people of all nations will be blessed. (Gen. 22:18)’

139

If the person expresses lack of faith in God, ask whether he has always felt that way. Then perhaps discuss why God has permitted wickedness and suffering. Memories of the Nazi holocaust have caused many Jews to be concerned about this.

If you discuss the importance of using God’s name, find out first how the other person feels about it. Point out that Exodus 20:7 forbids taking up God’s name in a worthless way, but it does not forbid using it with respect. Then reason on texts such as Exodus 3:15 (or Psalm 135:13); 1 Kings 8:41-43; Isaiah 12:4; Jeremiah 10:25; Malachi 3:16.

When you discuss the Messiah: (1) Talk first about the future blessings under his rule, instead of his identity. (2) Then reason on texts that point to a personal Messiah. (Gen. 22:17, 18; Zech. 9:9, 10; Dan. 7:13, 14) (3) You may need to discuss the two comings of the Messiah. (Contrast Daniel 7:13, 14 with Daniel 9:24-26.) (4) When referring to Jesus, do so in a context that emphasizes the progressive nature of God’s purpose. Mention that when Jesus taught, the time was near when God allowed the second temple to be destroyed, never to be rebuilt. But Jesus emphasized the fulfillment of the Law and of the Prophets and the glorious future to which these would direct persons with faith.

WHEN SOMEONE SAYS, ‘I’M A MUSLIM’

● A few points to have in mind are these: (1) The Koran is their principal “holy book.” Some will agree that the Bible is God’s Word, but they believe that it is superseded by the Koran. (2) They believe that there is only one true God. (3) They say that Jesus was one of the prophets, as was Muhammad, and that Muhammad (570-632 C.E.) was the Comforter foretold by Jesus. They believe Muhammad was the last and most important prophet. (4) They strongly believe that God has no son.

A common ground can sometimes be established in the following ways: (1) You might say: ‘I have come to discuss the Word of God with you. It tells about the problems of life that people like you and me experience and it shows us what the real solution is.’ Then discuss the Kingdom. (2) You could say: ‘I do not believe in Christendom’s Trinity. I worship the one true God, the Creator of heaven and earth.’ (3) ‘Am I right that you believe that Jesus (or Moses) was a prophet? . . . Was he a true prophet? . . . Then what he said was from God and if other teachings do not agree with it, they must be from another source, is that not so?’ Then use statements made by Jesus (or Moses) as a basis for further discussion.

If they make strong assertions concerning their beliefs, it can be beneficial to ask them, tactfully, to show you the point in the Koran, sura (chapter) and verse. (Wait while they search for it.) When they are unable to find it, some give evidence of greater willingness to listen to what you show them in the Bible.

Possible topics for discussion: (1) After laying a foundation, as above, you may be able to point out what God said to Moses about His personal name. (Ex. 3:15; Deut. 6:4, 5) (2) Material in this book under the main headings “Fate” and “Suffering” can be used to help some to see that God is not responsible for the injustice and suffering they experience and that lasting relief will come by means of God’s Kingdom. (3) If you are asked about your view regarding the Comforter, you can point out how Jesus spoke of it, showing that it is not a person and that it would remind his disciples of all the things that Jesus had taught them, rather than introduce a new religion. (John 14:26, KJ, NW; Acts 1:8) (4) If the objection is raised that God cannot have a Son, you might endeavor to reason on the matter. God’s having a Son does not mean that he had sexual relations with a wife. But God is the Creator. Since he gives life to those that he creates, can he not refer to himself as their Father? He speaks of his very first creation as his Son. He calls the angels sons of God, and he refers to Adam as his son. Why? Because he gave them life. How did Mary conceive Jesus? Not by sexual relations with God but, as the Bible says, it was by means of holy spirit, the same active force that God used in creation.—Matt. 3:17; 16:16, 17; Luke 1:35.

The booklet The Time for True Submission to God can be a real aid to sincere Muslims in understanding God’s purpose

140

*** rs p. 445 Scriptures Often Misapplied ***

Scriptures Often Misapplied

Genesis 1:1 415 9:25 303

Exodus 21:22, 23 25

Deuteronomy 6:4 415

1 Samuel 28:3-20 385

Ecclesiastes 3:1, 2 138 12:7 378

Isaiah 24:1-6 366 43:10 413 43:11 413

Jeremiah 4:23-29 366

Micah 5:2 409

Matthew 1:23 214 10:28 173 16:18 37 17:12, 13 318 25:46 171 26:26-29 262 28:19 414

Mark 16:17, 18 158, 404

Luke 16:19-31 174 17:21 226 21:27 313 21:33 115 23:43 286 24:36-39 334

John 1:1 212, 416 1:12, 13 77, 164 1:23 414 2:19-22 423 5:18 214 5:28, 29 338, 339 6:53-57 263, 268 8:58 417 9:1, 2 319 10:30 424 12:32 357 20:21-23 81 20:28 213

Acts 1:9-11 342 16:30-32 216 20:28 418

Romans 5:18 357 8:14-17 164 8:28, 29 143 9:5 418 11:25, 26 222

1 Corinthians 13:8-10 403 15:22 357 15:29 56

2 Corinthians 13:14 414

Ephesians 1:4, 5 144

Philippians 2:5, 6 419 2:9-11 198 3:20, 21 336

Colossians 1:15-17 408 2:9 420

1 Thessalonians 4:13-18 312

1 Timothy 2:3, 4 357

Titus 2:11 357 2:13 421

Hebrews 1:6 214 1:8 422 1:10-12 414

1 Peter 3:18 334 3:19, 20 163 4:6 163

2 Peter 3:7 113, 436 3:9 356

1 John 5:7, 8 422

Revelation 1:7 342 1:8 412 1:11 412 3:14 409 5:10 168 7:4-8 166 7:9, 10 167 14:9-11 172 20:3 366 20:4-6 338 20:10 172 21:1 114 21:2, 3 115 21:6, 7 412 22:12, 13 413

141

*** td 144C Bible Topics for Discussion ***

Bible Topics for Discussion (from New World Translation)

1. Ancestor Worship

A. Worship of ancestors is in vain Ancestors are dead, unconscious. Ec 9:5, 10 Original ancestors unworthy of worship. Ro 5:12, 14; 1Ti 2:14 God forbids such worship. Ex 34:14; Mt 4:10

B. Humans may be honored, but only God worshiped Youths should honor older persons. 1Ti 5:1, 2, 17; Eph 6:1-3 But God alone to be worshiped. Ac 10:25, 26; Re 22:8, 9

2. Armageddon

A. God’s war to end wickedness Nations gathered to Armageddon. Re 16:14, 16 God fights, using Son and angels. 2Th 1:6-9; Re 19:11-16 How we may survive. Zep 2:2, 3; Re 7:14

B. Love of God not violated World extremely corrupt. 2Ti 3:1-5 God patient, but justice requires action. 2Pe 3:9, 15; Lu 18:7, 8 Wicked must go so righteous can prosper. Pr 21:18; Re 11:18

3. Baptism

A. A Christian requirement Jesus set example. Mt 3:13-15; Heb 10:7 Symbol of disowning or dedication. Mt 16:24; 1Pe 3:21 Only for those old enough to be taught. Mt 28:19, 20; Ac 2:41 Immersion in water is proper way. Ac 8:38, 39; Joh 3:23

B. Does not wash sins away Jesus was not baptized to wash away sins. 1Pe 2:22; 3:18 Jesus’ blood washes away sins. 1Jo 1:7

4. Bible

A. God’s Word is inspired Men were moved by God’s spirit to write. 2Pe 1:20, 21 Contains prophecy: Da 8:5, 6, 20-22; Lu 21:5, 6, 20-22; Isa 45:1-4 Entire Bible inspired and beneficial. 2Ti 3:16, 17; Ro 15:4

B. Is a practical guide for our day Ignoring Bible principles is fatal. Ro 1:28-32 Man’s wisdom no substitute. 1Co 1:21, 25; 1Ti 6:20 A defense against strongest enemy. Eph 6:11, 12, 17 Guides man in the right way. Ps 119:105; 2Pe 1:19; Pr 3:5, 6

C. Written for peoples of all nations and races Bible writing began in the East. Ex 17:14; 24:12, 16; 34:27 God’s provision not just for Europeans. Ro 10:11-13; Ga 3:28 God accepts men of all sorts. Ac 10:34, 35; Ro 5:18; Re 7:9, 10

5. Blood

A. Transfusions violate sacredness of blood Noah was told that blood was sacred, was the life. Ge 9:4, 16 Law covenant prohibited feeding on blood. Le 17:14; 7:26, 27 Prohibition repeated to Christians. Ac 15:28, 29; 21:25

B. Question of saving life not justify breaking God’s law Obedience is better than sacrifice. 1Sa 15:22; Mr 12:33 Putting one’s life ahead of God’s law is fatal. Mr 8:35, 36

6. Chronology

A. 1914 (C.E.) ends Gentile Times Line of kingdom rulers interrupted, 607 B.C.E. Eze 21:25-27 “Seven times” to pass until rule restored. Da 4:32, 16, 17 Seven = 2 × 3 1⁄2 times, or 2 × 1,260 days. Re 12:6, 14; 11:2, 3 A day for a year. [Makes 2,520 years] Eze 4:6; Nu 14:34 To run until Kingdom’s establishment. Lu 21:24; Da 7:13, 14

7. Church

A. Church spiritual, built upon Christ God does not dwell in man-made temples. Ac 17:24, 25; 7:48 True church is spiritual temple of living stones. 1Pe 2:5, 6 Christ, cornerstone; apostles, secondary foundation. Eph 2:20 God to be worshiped with spirit and truth. Joh 4:24

B. Church not built upon Peter Jesus did not say church built upon Peter. Mt 16:18 Jesus identified as the “rock-mass.” 1Co 10:4 Peter identified Jesus as foundation. 1Pe 2:4, 6-8; Ac 4:8-12

8. Creation

A. Agrees with proved science; disproves evolution Science agrees with order of creation. Ge 1:11, 12, 21, 24, 25 God’s law of “kinds” holds true. Ge 1:11, 12; Jas 3:12

B. Creative days not 24-hour days “Day” can mean simply period of time. Ge 2:4 Day with God can be long time. Ps 90:4; 2Pe 3:8

9. Cross

A. Jesus hanged on an execution stake as a reproach Jesus was hanged on an execution stake or tree. Ac 5:30; 10:39; Ga 3:13 Christians must bear stake as reproach. Mt 10:38; Lu 9:23

B. Should not be worshiped Displaying Jesus’ stake a reproach. Heb 6:6; Mt 27:41, 42 Use of cross in worship is idolatry. Ex 20:4, 5; Jer 10:3-5

142

Jesus a spirit, not still on stake. 1Ti 3:16; 1Pe 3:18

10. Death

A. Cause of death Man had perfect start, prospect of endless life. Ge 1:28, 31 Disobedience brought sentence of death. Ge 2:16, 17; 3:17, 19 Sin and death have passed on to all Adam’s children. Ro 5:12

B. Condition of the dead Adam was made to be a soul, not given one. Ge 2:7; 1Co 15:45 It is man, the soul, that dies. Eze 18:4; Isa 53:12; Job 11:20 Dead are unconscious, know nothing. Ec 9:5, 10; Ps 146:3, 4 Dead asleep awaiting resurrection. Joh 11:11-14, 23-26; Ac 7:60

C. Talking with the dead impossible The dead not alive with God as spirits. Ps 115:17; Isa 38:18 Warned against trying to speak with dead. Isa 8:19; Le 19:31 Mediums, fortune-tellers, condemned. De 18:10-12; Ga 5:19-21

11. Devil, Demons

A. The Devil is a spirit person Not evil within oneself but a spirit person. 2Ti 2:26 Devil as much a person as the angels. Mt 4:1, 11; Job 1:6 Made himself Devil by wrong desire. Jas 1:13-15

B. The Devil is the invisible ruler of the world World under his control as god. 2Co 4:4; 1Jo 5:19; Re 12:9 Allowed to remain until issue settled. Ex 9:16; Joh 12:31 To be abyssed, then destroyed. Re 20:2, 3, 10

C. Demons are rebellious angels Joined Satan before Flood. Ge 6:1, 2; 1Pe 3:19, 20 Abased, cut off from all enlightenment. 2Pe 2:4; Jude 6 Fight against God, oppress mankind. Lu 8:27-29; Re 16:13, 14 To be destroyed with Satan. Mt 25:41; Lu 8:31; Re 20:2, 3, 10

12. Earth

A. God’s purpose for the earth Paradise made on earth for perfect humans. Ge 1:28; 2:8-15 God’s purpose is certain. Isa 55:11; 46:10, 11 Earth to be filled with peaceful, perfect men. Ps 72:7; Isa 45:18; 9:6, 7 Paradise to be restored by Kingdom. Mt 6:9, 10; Re 21:3-5

B. Will never be destroyed or depopulated Literal earth to be permanent. Ec 1:4; Ps 104:5 Mankind of Noah’s time destroyed, not earth. 2Pe 3:5-7; Ge 7:23 Example gives hope of surviving in our time. Mt 24:37-39 Wicked destroyed; “great crowd” survive. 2Th 1:6-9; Re 7:9, 14

13. False Prophets

A. False prophets foretold; existed in apostles’ day Rule to determine false prophets. De 18:20-22; Lu 6:26 Were foretold; recognized by fruits. Mt 24:23-26; 7:15-23

14. Healing, Tongues

A. Spiritual healing has permanent benefits

Spiritual sickness is destructive. Isa 1:4-6; 6:10; Ho 4:6 Spiritual healing the primary commission. Joh 6:63; Lu 4:18 Removes sins; gives happiness, life. Jas 5:19, 20; Re 7:14-17

B. God’s Kingdom will bring permanent physical cures Jesus cured infirmities, preached Kingdom blessings. Mt 4:23 Kingdom promised as means of permanent cure. Mt 6:10; Isa 9:7 Even death will be abolished. 1Co 15:25, 26; Re 21:4; 20:14

C. Modern faith healing lacks evidence of divine approval Disciples did not miraculously heal selves. 2Co 12:7-9; 1Ti 5:23 Miraculous gifts ended after apostles’ day. 1Co 13:8-11 Healing not sure evidence of God’s favor. Mt 7:22, 23; 2Th 2:9-11

D. Speaking in tongues only a temporary provision Was sign; greater gifts to be sought. 1Co 14:22; 12:30, 31 Miraculous gifts of spirit foretold to pass away. 1Co 13:8-10 Wonderful works not sure proof of God’s favor. Mt 7:22, 23; 24:24

15. Heaven

A. Only 144,000 go to heaven A limited number; to be kings with Christ. Re 5:9, 10; 20:4 Jesus was forerunner; others chosen since. Col 1:18; 1Pe 2:21 Many others will live on earth. Ps 72:8; Re 21:3, 4 144,000 in special position no others have. Re 14:1, 3; 7:4, 9

16. Hell (Hades, Sheol)

A. Not a literal place of fiery torment Suffering Job prayed to go there. Job 14:13 A place of inactivity. Ps 6:5; Ec 9:10; Isa 38:18, 19 Jesus was raised from grave, hell. Ac 2:27, 31, 32; Ps 16:10 Hell will deliver up other dead, be destroyed. Re 20:13, 14

B. Fire is a symbol of annihilation Cutting off in death symbolized by fire. Mt 25:41, 46; 13:30 Unrepentant wicked destroyed forever as by fire. Heb 10:26, 27 Satan’s fiery “torment” is everlasting death. Re 20:10, 14, 15

C. Rich man and Lazarus account no proof of eternal torment Fire no more literal than Abraham’s bosom. Lu 16:22-24 Abraham’s favor also contrasted with darkness. Mt 8:11, 12 Babylon’s annihilation called a fiery torment. Re 18:8-10, 21

17. Holidays, Birthdays

A. Birthdays, Christmas, not observed by early Christians Those not true worshipers observed. Ge 40:20; Mt 14:6 Jesus’ death day to be commemorated. Lu 22:19, 20; 1Co 11:25, 26 Celebration revelries improper. Ro 13:13; Ga 5:21; 1Pe 4:3

18. Images

A. Use of images, statues, in worship is a reproach to God No image of God possible. 1Jo 4:12; Isa 40:18; 46:5; Ac 17:29 Christians warned against images. 1Co 10:14; 1Jo 5:21 God must be worshiped with spirit, truth. Joh 4:24

B. Image worship proved fatal to the nation of Israel Worship of images prohibited to Jews. Ex 20:4, 5

143

Cannot hear, speak; makers become like them. Ps 115:4-8 Brought a snare, destruction. Ps 106:36, 40-42; Jer 22:8, 9

C. “Relative” worship unauthorized God refused to allow “relative” worship of himself. Isa 42:8 God is the only “Hearer of prayer.” Ps 65:1, 2

19. Interfaith

A. Joining with other religions not God’s way Only one way, is narrow, few find it. Eph 4:4-6; Mt 7:13, 14 Warned that false doctrine contaminates. Mt 16:6, 12; Ga 5:9 Commanded to be separate. 2Ti 3:5; 2Co 6:14-17; Re 18:4

B. “Good in all religions” is not true Some have zeal but not in accord with God. Ro 10:2, 3 Badness spoils what else might be good. 1Co 5:6; Mt 7:15-17 False teachers bring destruction. 2Pe 2:1; Mt 12:30; 15:14 Clean worship demands exclusive devotion. De 6:5, 14, 15

20. Jehovah, God

A. God’s name “God” indefinite term; our Lord has a personal name. 1Co 8:5, 6 We pray for his name to be sanctified. Mt 6:9, 10 Jehovah is God’s name. Ps 83:18; Ex 6:2, 3; 3:15; Isa 42:8 Name in KJ. Ex 6:3 (Dy footnote). Ps 83:18; Isa 12:2; 26:4 Jesus made name known. Joh 17:6, 26; 5:43; 12:12, 13, 28

B. God’s existence Impossible to see God and live. Ex 33:20; Joh 1:18; 1Jo 4:12 No need to see God to believe. Heb 11:1; Ro 8:24, 25; 10:17 God is known by his visible works. Ro 1:20; Ps 19:1, 2 Fulfillment of prophecy proves God’s existence. Isa 46:8-11

C. God’s attributes God is love. 1Jo 4:8, 16; Ex 34:6; 2Co 13:11; Mic 7:18 Excels in wisdom. Job 12:13; Ro 11:33; 1Co 2:7 Is just, exercises justice. De 32:4; Ps 37:28 Is almighty, has all power. Job 37:23; Re 7:12; 4:11

D. Not all are serving the same God Way that appears good not always right. Pr 16:25; Mt 7:21 Two roads, only one leads to life. Mt 7:13, 14; De 30:19 Many gods but only one true God. 1Co 8:5, 6; Ps 82:1 Knowing true God essential for life. Joh 17:3; 1Jo 5:20

21. Jehovah’s Witnesses

A. Origin of Jehovah’s Witnesses Jehovah identifies his own witnesses. Isa 43:10-12; Jer 15:16 Line of faithful witnesses began with Abel. Heb 11:4, 39; 12:1 Jesus was faithful and true witness. Joh 18:37; Re 1:5; 3:14

22. Jesus

A. Jesus is God’s Son and appointed King Firstborn of God, used in creating all other things. Re 3:14; Col 1:15-17 Made a man born of woman, lower than angels. Ga 4:4; Heb 2:9 Born of God’s spirit, with destiny in heaven. Mt 3:16, 17 Exalted higher than during prehuman existence. Php 2:9, 10

B. Belief in Jesus Christ essential to salvation Christ is promised Seed of Abraham. Ge 22:18; Ga 3:16 Jesus only High Priest, ransom. 1Jo 2:1, 2; Heb 7:25, 26; Mt 20:28 Life through knowing God and Christ, obedience. Joh 17:3; Ac 4:12

C. More than belief in Jesus is required Belief must be accompanied by works. Jas 2:17-26; 1:22-25 Must obey commands, do work he did. Joh 14:12, 15; 1Jo 2:3 Not all using name of Lord will enter Kingdom. Mt 7:21-23

23. Kingdom

A. What God’s Kingdom will do for mankind To bring God’s will to pass. Mt 6:9, 10; Ps 45:6; Re 4:11 A government with king and laws. Isa 9:6, 7; 2:3; Ps 72:1, 8 Destroy wickedness, rule entire earth. Da 2:44; Ps 72:8 1,000-year rule to restore mankind, Paradise. Re 21:2-4; 20:6

B. Operation begins while Christ’s enemies still active After Christ raised he had long wait. Ps 110:1; Heb 10:12, 13 Takes power, wars against Satan. Ps 110:2; Re 12:7-9; Lu 10:18 Kingdom established then, earth’s woes follow. Re 12:10, 12 Trouble now means time to stand for Kingdom. Re 11:15-18

C. Not ‘in hearts,’ not developed through men’s efforts Kingdom is in heaven, not earth. 2Ti 4:18; 1Co 15:50; Ps 11:4 Not ‘in hearts’; Jesus addressing Pharisees. Lu 17:20, 21 Not any part of this world. Joh 18:36; Lu 4:5-8; Da 2:44 Governments, world standards, replaced. Da 2:44

24. Last Days

A. What is meant by “the end of the world” Windup of the system of things. Mt 24:3; 2Pe 3:5-7; Mr 13:4 Not end of earth, but of wicked system. 1Jo 2:17 Time of end precedes destruction. Mt 24:14 Escape for righteous; new world follows. 2Pe 2:9; Re 7:14-17

B. Need to be awake to signs of last days Signs provided by God for our guidance. 2Ti 3:1-5; 1Th 5:1-4 World fails to realize seriousness. 2Pe 3:3, 4, 7; Mt 24:39 God not slow, but gives warning. 2Pe 3:9 Reward for being awake, concerned. Lu 21:34-36

25. Life

A. Everlasting life is assured for obedient mankind God, who cannot lie, has promised life. Tit 1:2; Joh 10:27, 28 Eternal life assured those exercising faith. Joh 11:25, 26 Death will be destroyed. 1Co 15:26; Re 21:4; 20:14; Isa 25:8

B. Heavenly life is limited to those in Christ’s body God selects members as it pleases him. Mt 20:23; 1Co 12:18 Only 144,000 taken from earth. Re 14:1, 4; 7:2-4; 5:9, 10 Not even John the Baptizer to be in heavenly Kingdom. Mt 11:11

C. Earthly life promised to unlimited number, “other sheep” Limited number with Jesus in heavens. Re 14:1, 4; 7:2-4 “Other sheep” not Christ’s brothers. Joh 10:16; Mt 25:32, 40 Many now gathering for earthly survival. Re 7:9, 15-17

144

Others raised for life on earth. Re 20:12; 21:4

26. Marriage

A. Marriage union must be honorable Likened to Christ and bride. Eph 5:22, 23 Marriage bed must be undefiled. Heb 13:4 Couples counseled not to separate. 1Co 7:10-16 Por·nei´a only Scriptural ground for divorce. Mt 19:9

B. Headship principle must be respected by Christians Husband as head must love, care for family. Eph 5:23-31 Wife, in subjection, loves, obeys husband. 1Pe 3:1-7; Eph 5:22 Children must be obedient. Eph 6:1-3; Col 3:20

C. Christian parents’ responsibility to children Must show love, giving time, attention. Tit 2:4 Do not irritate them. Col 3:21 Provide, including spiritual things. 2Co 12:14; 1Ti 5:8 Give them training for life. Eph 6:4; Pr 22:6, 15; 23:13, 14

D. Christians should marry only Christians Marry only “in the Lord.” 1Co 7:39; De 7:3, 4; Ne 13:26

E. Polygamy not Scriptural Originally man was to have only one wife. Ge 2:18, 22-25 Jesus restored standard for Christians. Mt 19:3-9 Early Christians not polygamous. 1Co 7:2, 12-16; Eph 5:28-31

27. Mary Worship

A. Mary mother of Jesus, not “mother of God” God is without beginning. Ps 90:2; 1Ti 1:17 Mary was mother of God’s Son, in his earthly state. Lu 1:35

B. Mary not “ever virgin” She married Joseph. Mt 1:19, 20, 24, 25 Had other children besides Jesus. Mt 13:55, 56; Lu 8:19-21 These not then his “spiritual brothers.” Joh 7:3, 5

28. Memorial, Mass

A. Commemoration of Lord’s Evening Meal Observed once a year on Passover date. Lu 22:1, 17-20; Ex 12:14 Commemorates Christ’s sacrificial death. 1Co 11:26; Mt 26:28 Those with heavenly hope partake. Lu 22:29, 30; 12:32, 37 How a person knows he has such hope. Ro 8:15-17

B. Mass unscriptural Forgiveness of sins requires shedding of blood. Heb 9:22 Christ is sole Mediator of new covenant. 1Ti 2:5, 6; Joh 14:6 Christ in heaven; not brought down by priest. Ac 3:20, 21 No need to repeat Christ’s sacrifice. Heb 9:24-26; 10:11-14

29. Minister

A. All Christians must be ministers Jesus was God’s minister. Ro 15:8, 9; Mt 20:28 Christians follow his example. 1Pe 2:21; 1Co 11:1 Must preach to accomplish the ministry. 2Ti 4:2, 5; 1Co 9:16

B. Qualifications for the ministry God’s spirit and knowledge of his Word. 2Ti 2:15; Isa 61:1-3 Follow Christ’s pattern in preaching. 1Pe 2:21; 2Ti 4:2, 5 God trains by spirit, organization. Joh 14:26; 2Co 3:1-3

30. Opposition, Persecution

A. Reason for opposition toward Christians Jesus was hated, foretold opposition. Joh 15:18-20; Mt 10:22 Adhering to right principles indicts world. 1Pe 4:1, 4, 12, 13 Satan, god of this system, opposes Kingdom. 2Co 4:4; 1Pe 5:8 Christian does not fear, God sustains. Ro 8:38, 39; Jas 4:8

B. Wife should not allow husband to separate her from God Forewarned; others may misinform him. Mt 10:34-38; Ac 28:22 She must look to God and Christ. Joh 6:68; 17:3 By faithfulness may save him also. 1Co 7:16; 1Pe 3:1-6 Husband is head, but not to dictate worship. 1Co 11:3; Ac 5:29

C. Husband should not allow wife to prevent his serving God Must love wife and family, want life for them. 1Co 7:16 Responsible to decide, provide. 1Co 11:3; 1Ti 5:8 God loves man who stands for truth. Jas 1:12; 5:10, 11 Compromise for sake of peace brings God’s disfavor. Heb 10:38 Lead family to happiness in new world. Re 21:3, 4

31. Prayer

A. Prayers that God hears God does listen to prayers of men. Ps 145:18; 1Pe 3:12 Unrighteous not heard unless course changed. Isa 1:15-17 Must pray in Jesus’ name. Joh 14:13, 14; 2Co 1:20 Must pray in harmony with God’s will. 1Jo 5:14, 15 Faith essential. Jas 1:6-8

B. Vain repetition, prayers to Mary or “saints” not valid Must pray to God in Jesus’ name. Joh 14:6, 14; 16:23, 24 Repetitious words will not be heard. Mt 6:7

32. Predestination

A. Man not predestinated God’s purpose sure. Isa 55:11; Ge 1:28 Individuals given choice of serving God. Joh 3:16; Php 2:12

33. Ransom

A. Jesus’ human life paid as a “ransom for all” Jesus gave his life a ransom. Mt 20:28 Value of shed blood provides remission of sin. Heb 9:14, 22 One sacrifice was sufficient for all time. Ro 6:10; Heb 9:26 Benefits are not automatic; must be acknowledged. Joh 3:16

B. Was corresponding price Adam created perfect. De 32:4; Ec 7:29; Ge 1:31 Lost perfection for self and children by sin. Ro 5:12, 18 Children helpless; exact equal of Adam needed. Ps 49:7; De 19:21 Jesus’ perfect human life a ransom. 1Ti 2:5, 6; 1Pe 1:18, 19

34. Religion

145

A. Only one true religion One hope, one faith, one baptism. Eph 4:5, 13 Commissioned to make disciples. Mt 28:19; Ac 8:12; 14:21 Recognized by its fruit. Mt 7:19, 20; Lu 6:43, 44; Joh 15:8 Love, agreement among members. Joh 13:35; 1Co 1:10; 1Jo 4:20

B. False doctrine is properly condemned Jesus condemned false doctrine. Mt 23:15, 23, 24; 15:4-9 Did so for protection of blinded ones. Mt 15:14 Truth made them free to be Jesus’ disciples. Joh 8:31, 32

C. Changing one’s religion essential if proved wrong Truth makes free; proves many are wrong. Joh 8:31, 32 Israelites, others, left former worship. Jos 24:15; 2Ki 5:17 Early Christians changed views. Ga 1:13, 14; Ac 3:17, 19 Paul changed his religion. Ac 26:4-6 Whole world deceived; must make mind over. Re 12:9; Ro 12:2

D. Apparent “good in all religions” does not assure God’s favor God sets the standard for worship. Joh 4:23, 24; Jas 1:27 Not good if not as God wills. Ro 10:2, 3 “Good works” can be rejected. Mt 7:21-23 Recognized by fruitage. Mt 7:20

35. Resurrection

A. Hope for the dead All in tombs to be raised. Joh 5:28, 29 Resurrection of Jesus is a guarantee. 1Co 15:20-22; Ac 17:31 Sinners against spirit will not rise. Mt 12:31, 32 Those showing faith assured of it. Joh 11:25

B. Resurrection to life either in heaven or on earth All die in Adam; receive life in Jesus. 1Co 15:20-22; Ro 5:19 Difference in nature of those raised. 1Co 15:40, 42, 44 Those with Jesus will be like him. 1Co 15:49; Php 3:20, 21 Those not ruling will be on earth. Re 20:4b, 5, 13; 21:3, 4

36. Return of Christ

A. Return invisible to humans Told disciples world would see him no more. Joh 14:19 Only disciples saw ascension; return similar. Ac 1:6, 10, 11 In heaven, an invisible spirit. 1Ti 6:14-16; Heb 1:3 Returns in heavenly Kingdom power. Da 7:13, 14

B. Recognized by physical facts Disciples asked for sign of presence. Mt 24:3 Christians “see” presence through understanding. Eph 1:18 Many events make up evidence of presence. Lu 21:10, 11 Enemies “see” as destruction overtakes. Re 1:7

37. Sabbath

A. Sabbath day not binding on Christians Law abolished on basis of Jesus’ death. Eph 2:15 Sabbath not binding on Christians. Col 2:16, 17; Ro 14:5, 10 Reproved for observing Sabbath, etc. Ga 4:9-11; Ro 10:2-4 Enter God’s rest by faith and obedience. Heb 4:9-11

B. Sabbath observance required only of ancient Israel Sabbath first observed after Exodus. Ex 16:26, 27, 29, 30 Unique to natural Israel as sign. Ex 31:16, 17; Ps 147:19, 20 Sabbath years also required under Law. Ex 23:10, 11; Le 25:3, 4 Sabbath not necessary thing for Christians. Ro 14:5, 10; Ga 4:9-11

C. God’s Sabbath rest (7th day of creative “week”) Began at close of earthly creation. Ge 2:2, 3; Heb 4:3-5 Continued past Jesus’ day on earth. Heb 4:6-8; Ps 95:7-9, 11 Christians rest from works of self-interest. Heb 4:9, 10 Ends when Kingdom completes work toward earth. 1Co 15:24, 28

38. Salvation

A. Salvation is from God through Jesus’ ransom sacrifice Life is God’s gift through his Son. 1Jo 4:9, 14; Ro 6:23 Salvation is possible only through Jesus’ sacrifice. Ac 4:12 No works possible in “deathbed repentance.” Jas 2:14, 26 Must work energetically to attain. Lu 13:23, 24; 1Ti 4:10

B. “Once saved, always saved” is not Scriptural Partakers of holy spirit can fall. Heb 6:4, 6; 1Co 9:27 Many Israelites destroyed though saved from Egypt. Jude 5 Salvation is not instantaneous. Php 2:12; 3:12-14; Mt 10:22 Those turning back are worse off than before. 2Pe 2:20, 21

C. “Universal salvation” is unscriptural Repentance impossible for some. Heb 6:4-6 God has no pleasure in death of wicked. Eze 33:11; 18:32 But love cannot condone unrighteousness. Heb 1:9 Wicked will be destroyed. Heb 10:26-29; Re 20:7-15

39. Sin

A. What sin is A violation of God’s law, his perfect standard. 1Jo 3:4; 5:17 Man, as God’s creation, accountable to him. Ro 14:12; 2:12-15 Law defined sin, made men aware of it. Ga 3:19; Ro 3:20 All in sin, short of God’s perfect standard. Ro 3:23; Ps 51:5

B. Why all have suffered from Adam’s sin Adam passed imperfection, death to all. Ro 5:12, 18 God was merciful in tolerating humankind. Ps 103:8, 10, 14, 17 Jesus’ sacrifice atones for sins. 1Jo 2:2 Sin and all other works of Devil to be erased. 1Jo 3:8

C. Forbidden fruit was disobedience, not sex act Prohibition of tree made before Eve created. Ge 2:17, 18 Adam and Eve told to have children. Ge 1:28 Children not result of sin, but of God’s blessing. Ps 127:3-5 Eve sinned when husband absent; ran ahead. Ge 3:6; 1Ti 2:11-14 Adam, as head, rebelled against God’s law. Ro 5:12, 19

D. What sin against holy spirit is (Mt 12:32; Mr 3:28, 29) Inherited sin not such kind. Ro 5:8, 12, 18; 1Jo 5:17 One may grieve spirit, yet recover. Eph 4:30; Jas 5:19, 20 Willful practice of sin leads to death. 1Jo 3:6-9 God judges such, removes his spirit. Heb 6:4-8 We should not pray for such unrepentant ones. 1Jo 5:16, 17

146

40. Soul

A. What the soul is Man is a soul. Ge 2:7; 1Co 15:45; Jos 11:11; Ac 27:37 Animals also called souls. Nu 31:28; Re 16:3; Le 24:18 Soul has blood, eats, can die. Jer 2:34; Le 7:18; Eze 18:4 Man, having life, is said to have soul. Mr 8:36; Joh 10:15

B. Difference between soul and spirit Life as a person or creature is soul. Joh 10:15; Le 17:11 Life-force activating souls called “spirit.” Ps 146:4; 104:29 When one dies, control of life-force returns to God. Ec 12:7 God alone can put life-force into action. Eze 37:12-14

41. Spirit, Spiritism

A. What the holy spirit is God’s active force, not a person. Ac 2:2, 3, 33; Joh 14:17 Used in creation, inspiration of Bible, etc. Ge 1:2; Eze 11:5 Begets, anoints, Christ’s body members. Joh 3:5-8; 2Co 1:21, 22 Empowers, leads God’s people today. Ga 5:16, 18

B. Life-force called spirit Principle of life, sustained by breathing. Jas 2:26; Job 27:3 Power over life-force resides with God. Zec 12:1; Ec 8:8 Life-force of humans, beasts, belongs to God. Ec 3:19-21 Spirit committed to God with hope of resurrection. Lu 23:46

C. Spiritism must be shunned as work of demons God’s Word forbids. Isa 8:19, 20; Le 19:31; 20:6, 27 Fortune-telling is demonism; condemned. Ac 16:16-18 Leads to destruction. Ga 5:19-21; Re 21:8; 22:15 Astrology forbidden. De 18:10-12; Jer 10:2

42. Trinity

A. God, the Father, one Person, greatest in universe God is not three persons. De 6:4; Mal 2:10; Mr 10:18; Ro 3:29, 30 Son created; God alone before. Re 3:14; Col 1:15; Isa 44:6 God ruler of universe at all times. Php 2:5, 6; Da 4:35 God to be exalted above all. Php 2:10, 11

B. Son inferior to Father before and after coming to earth Son obedient in heaven, sent by Father. Joh 8:42; 12:49 Obedient on earth, Father greater. Joh 14:28; 5:19; Heb 5:8 Exalted in heaven, still subject. Php 2:9; 1Co 15:28; Mt 20:23 Jehovah is Christ’s head and God. 1Co 11:3; Joh 20:17; Re 1:6

C. Oneness of God and Christ Always in complete harmony. Joh 8:28, 29; 14:10 Oneness, like that of husband and wife. Joh 10:30; Mt 19:4-6 All believers must have same oneness. Joh 17:20-22; 1Co 1:10

One worship of Jehovah through Christ forever. Joh 4:23, 24

D. God’s holy spirit is his active force A force, not a person. Mt 3:16; Joh 20:22; Ac 2:4, 17, 33 Not a person in heaven with God and Christ. Ac 7:55, 56; Re 7:10 Directed by God to accomplish purposes. Ps 104:30; 1Co 12:4-11 Those serving God receive, guided by it. 1Co 2:12, 13; Ga 5:16

43. Wickedness, World Distress

A. Who is responsible for world distress Wicked rule cause of bad times today. Pr 29:2; 28:28 Ruler of world the enemy of God. 2Co 4:4; 1Jo 5:19; Joh 12:31 Woes brought by Devil, time short. Re 12:9, 12 Devil bound, glorious peace follows. Re 20:1-3; 21:3, 4

B. Why wickedness permitted Devil challenged loyalty of creatures to God. Job 1:11, 12 Faithful given opportunity to prove loyal. Ro 9:17; Pr 27:11 Devil proved a liar, issue to be settled. Joh 12:31 Faithful rewarded with everlasting life. Ro 2:6, 7; Re 21:3-5

C. Prolonged time of the end is merciful provision As in Noah’s day, takes time to give warning. Mt 24:14, 37-39 God not slow, but merciful. 2Pe 3:9; Isa 30:18 Bible helps us avoid being caught unawares. Lu 21:36; 1Th 5:4 Seek God’s provision now for protection. Isa 2:2-4; Zep 2:3

D. Solution to world distress not from men Men very fearful, perplexed. Lu 21:10, 11; 2Ti 3:1-5 God’s Kingdom, not men, will succeed. Da 2:44; Mt 6:10 To live, sue for peace with King now. Ps 2:9, 11, 12

44. Witnessing

A. All Christians must witness, tell good news Must acknowledge Jesus before men to be approved. Mt 10:32 Must be doer of Word, demonstrating faith. Jas 1:22-24; 2:24 New ones, too, should become teachers. Mt 28:19, 20 Public declaration brings salvation. Ro 10:10

B. Need for repeated calls, continued witnessing Warning of end must be given. Mt 24:14 Jeremiah announced Jerusalem’s end for years. Jer 25:3 Like early Christians, cannot stop. Ac 4:18-20; 5:28, 29

C. Must bear witness to be free of bloodguilt Must warn of approaching end. Eze 33:7; Mt 24:14 Failure brings bloodguilt. Eze 33:8, 9; 3:18, 19 Paul freed of bloodguilt; spoke full truth. Ac 20:26, 27; 1Co 9:16 Saves both witness and one listening. 1Ti 4:16; 1Co 9:22

147

*** w87 2/15 pp. 1520*** …..9 Ways to Witness

Showing Appreciation for the Two Greatest Expressions of Love

“As for us, we love, because he first loved us.”—1 JOHN 4:19.

HOW can we best show our appreciation for the great love that Jehovah God and Jesus Christ have expressed toward us? A primary way is by imitating Jesus, who tirelessly witnessed to his Father’s name and Kingdom. (1 Peter 2:21) He did so in homes, in synagogues, in the temple, on mountainsides, and at the seashore. Let us consider nine distinct ways that may be open to us.

The House-to-House Activity 2 The first, and perhaps most distinctive, way in which we can show our love and appreciation is by going from

house to house with the good news of God’s Kingdom. Doing so requires real freeness of speech because it continually involves direct confrontation with others, many of whom will view us as a bother. It takes genuine love for God and for neighbor to keep going from door to door, though we may meet up with indifference, annoyance, contempt, or direct opposition.—Compare Ezekiel 3:7-9.

3 The Gospel record of Jesus’ instructions to his 12 apostles, and later to the 70 evangelists, clearly indicates that they were to go from house to house preaching the good news of God’s Kingdom. (Matthew 10:5-14; Luke 10:1-7) At Acts 20:20 Paul tells of his going from house to house. Those words have been applied to his making shepherding calls, but verse 21 leaves no doubt as to the activity meant, for Paul adds: “I thoroughly bore witness both to Jews and to Greeks”—not to Christian brothers and sisters—“about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus.” When making shepherding calls, an elder usually does not urge ‘repentance toward God and faith in Jesus.’ Rather, he encourages fellow Christians to have increased appreciation of meetings or the ministry, or he helps them with personal problems.

4 Not only is there sound Scriptural basis for our going from house to house but the fruits of that activity show that Jehovah’s blessing is upon it. Yes, “wisdom is proved righteous by its works.” (Matthew 11:19) Frequently, those going from house to house have seen evidence of angelic direction that leads them to those who are hungering and thirsting for righteousness. The householder has said that he or she had been praying for help and that the Witness’ visit answered that prayer.

5 What great help for the field service we have in the book Reasoning From the Scriptures! It contains many appealing introductions for Bible discussions as well as useful information on numerous Scriptural or religious subjects. So not only carry it but keep referring to it. The pioneers in particular have expressed great appreciation for this valuable field-service aid. Could you manifest your appreciation for God’s love by using this book more fully and more effectively?

6 We should not overlook the fact that we personally stand to benefit greatly by sharing in the house-to-house ministry. As we Christians act on our faith, it becomes more firm; as we speak with conviction, it is strengthened. We cannot tell others about our hope without our own hope becoming brighter. There is nothing like participating regularly in the house-to-house ministry for cultivating the fruits of the spirit mentioned at Galatians 5:22, 23. It simply has to be that way, for the Bible assures us: “A generous man will prosper; he who refreshes others will himself be refreshed.”—Proverbs 11:25, New International Version.

148

Making Return Visits 7 A second way for us to respond to the love that God and Christ have shown us is by making return visits on

persons who previously evinced an interest in the Kingdom message. Paul and Barnabas were concerned about those to whom they had preached. (Acts 15:36) In fact, consistency requires that we make return visits. While witnessing from door to door, informally, or on the streets, we are looking for those “conscious of their spiritual need.” (Matthew 5:3) Obviously, giving them, as it were, one glass of spiritual water or one piece of spiritual bread is by no means enough. For them to get on the road to life, they need more help.

8 Our first efforts might be likened to planting seeds of truth. But as the apostle Paul indicated at 1 Corinthians 3:6, 7, more is needed. It was not enough that he planted. The seeds also required water, such as Apollos supplied. Then it could be expected that God would make it grow. This feature of the work is neglected by some, and yet many consider it to be really the easiest feature of the Christian ministry. Why? Because the people we call on have already shown some interest.

Conducting Home Bible Studies 9 When return visits are made regularly on persons who have shown an interest in the Kingdom message, the

result often is a home Bible study—a third way in which we can show our appreciation. It really can be the most enjoyable and most rewarding feature of our ministry. Why? Well, what a joy it is to see people grow in knowledge and appreciation of Bible truths, to see them make changes in their lives, and to assist them until they dedicate themselves to do God’s will and get baptized! Such ones can truly be viewed as our spiritual children and we as their spiritual parents.—Compare 1 Corinthians 4:14, 15; 1 Peter 5:13.

10 Consider a typical example. A missionary going from house to house in a Caribbean island met a hippie couple whose home was anything but neat and orderly. Yet they expressed interest. A Bible study aid was placed, and a home Bible study was started with the couple, who were not married although they had several children. As the study progressed, the home began to look more presentable and so did the couple and their children. Before long the couple asked the missionary to marry them, opening the way to their getting baptized. Then one day the new brother happily displayed his auto driver’s license, the first he had ever obtained. Yes, before he became one of Jehovah’s Witnesses, he had not seen the need to get either a marriage license or a driver’s license, but now he was obeying both God’s laws and those of caesar.

Street Witnessing 11 A fourth way in which we can show our appreciation for what God and Christ have done for us is by street

witnessing. When we take part, we are helping to fulfill Proverbs 1:20, 21 in a somewhat literal way: “True wisdom itself keeps crying aloud in the very street. In the public squares it keeps giving forth its voice. At the upper end of the noisy streets it calls out.”

12 There are ever so many good reasons for us to share regularly in this feature of Kingdom preaching. In many areas, it is more and more difficult to find people at home. They are either sharing in some form of recreation, shopping, or working. Also, many people live in exclusive apartment buildings or condominiums, not to mention those living in hotels. But usually there are people to be seen on the streets.

13 An elder in the United States currently conducts four home Bible studies with individuals whom he first contacted in the street witnessing activity. Of course, he does not simply stand mute (although in some lands that is all that the law permits). Rather, with a friendly smile and cheerful voice, he approaches people who are standing, waiting for a bus, or walking along leisurely. His ‘utterances are with graciousness, seasoned with salt,’ and he uses discernment

149

as to how to approach each one. (Colossians 4:5, 6; 1 Peter 3:15) Not only has he obtained home Bible studies by such street witnessing but he is also very successful in placing literature with many. Yes, by being neatly groomed and having a friendly smile together with freeness of speech, you can be very effective in street witnessing. In fact, five Witnesses recently placed more than 30 copies of the book Life—How Did It Get Here? By Evolution or by Creation? in public shopping areas. Many of the books were obtained by people sitting in their cars.

Informal Witnessing 14 A fifth way for us to show appreciation for the great love that God and Christ have expressed to us is by informal

witnessing. How effective this has often been, both in finding persons hungering and thirsting for righteousness and in placing literature! It certainly is one way by which we can heed the advice found at Ephesians 5:15, 16, ‘to buy out the opportune time for ourselves.’ A missionary struck up a conversation with a fellow passenger in a taxicab. The man showed interest. Return visits were made and a Bible study was started. Today that man is a Christian elder. Elsewhere an elder started a conversation with a woman who, it turned out, was changing her religion to marry a Jew. She wanted to know who came first, Moses, Noah, David, and so forth. He told her that what she needed was the Bible Stories book, which presents Bible events in chronological order. Although he was a perfect stranger to her, she readily gave him her name and address and the necessary contribution so that he could mail the book to her.

15 Sometimes, for fear we may get rebuffed, we may hesitate to start a conversation with someone traveling next to us. How often, though, we are richly rewarded if we summon up the courage to do so! Appreciation of God’s goodness and people’s need will help us to have the necessary courage. Yes, remember that “God did not give us a spirit of timidity, but a spirit of power, of love and of self-discipline.”—2 Timothy 1:7, NIV.

Welcoming Strangers 16 A sixth way in which we can show our gratitude to God and Christ is by welcoming strangers that show up at our

Kingdom Hall. Love for neighbor should make us alert to notice any stranger that visits our place of worship. Let us strive to make him feel at ease, to feel that he is among friends who are sincerely interested in his spiritual well-being. Most likely, more than idle curiosity brought him there. He may truly be hungering and thirsting for righteousness. Our genuine concern for him may result in our starting a home Bible study, helping him on the road to life. (Matthew 5:3, 6; 7:13, 14) In fact, this very thing has happened often. A missionary from the first class of the Watchtower Bible School of Gilead noted that his two most promising Bible students were those whom he first met at the Kingdom Hall.

Witnessing by Writing Letters 17 A seventh way for us to witness, in response to the love God and Christ have shown us, is by writing letters.

Often, those who use this form of witnessing get some very appreciative letters in reply. This is a method employed by some full-time ministers who may temporarily be unable to go from house to house because of physical infirmity. For example: There was a family with 12 children. One day the father came home to find five of them shot in cold blood by one of his daughter’s suitors. In vain he looked for comfort from Christendom’s clergy. Then one day he received a letter from a stranger, a Witness who had read in the press about his tragedy and who wanted to comfort him, enclosing a Truth book. This was just what the man was looking for. Today he, too, is a zealous Witness.

Making Phone Calls 18 To mention an eighth avenue of witnessing, there is the opportunity to use the telephone in preaching the

Kingdom good news. This increasingly is proving to be a pleasant and an effective form of witnessing. More and more Witnesses are becoming skilled in this feature of the ministry, which has much to recommend it. By it we reach some

150

people whom we are unable to meet in the house-to-house activity. When phone witnessing is done discreetly, with kindness, tact, and skill, some have found even better response than from calling on such persons at their homes.

19 A Japanese congregation in an English-speaking country uses the telephone book as part of its territory. Publishers phone up Japanese names and arrange to make a personal call where they find interest. They have started literally dozens of studies by this means.

Witnessing by Good Conduct 20 A ninth way in which we can bring praise to God is by our good conduct. A Russian journalist once stated that

our fine conduct was our best sermon. In fact, repeatedly the press has commented on Jehovah’s Witnesses’ high morality. One reported: “Jehovah’s Witnesses are recognizably the most honest people in the Federal Republic of Germany.” At the beginning of her school term, a Witness girl brought the School brochure to her teacher. He bluntly rejected it, saying he wanted nothing to do with the Witnesses. However, in time her fine conduct won her his highest praise and caused an entire change of attitude on his part toward the Witnesses. Of similar import is the letter that Witness parents received from their children’s schoolteacher: “The undeniable measure of the success of your beliefs is your children.”

151

Index

9

9 Ways to Witness ∙ 149

A

Armageddon ∙ 44, 89, 131, 140, 143 Atheist ∙ 105, 106

B

Bible Really Teach ∙ 47, 48 Bible Studies ∙ 39, 40, 42, 61, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77,

78, 79, 98, 150 Bible Teach Book ∙ 5, 44, 48 Bible Topics for Discussion ∙ 143 BIBLE/GOD ∙ 131 Brochures ∙ 5, 31, 32 Buddhist ∙ 101, 102, 140 Business Territory ∙ 90

C

Children ∙ 28 Conversation Starters ∙ 55 Conversation Stoppers ∙ 135 Corruption ∙ 35 Crime ∙ 18, 35, 86 CRIME/SAFETY ∙ 131 CURRENT EVENTS ∙ 132

D

Death ∙ 35, 38, 44, 104, 134, 144, 146 Depression ∙ 35 Direct Approach ∙ 59 Does God Really Care About Us ∙ 16, 31, 33, 37, 102 DONATION ∙ 7 Draw Close to Jehovah ∙ 50, 60

E

EMPLOYMENT/HOUSING ∙ 132 Environment ∙ 19 Everlasting Life ∙ 45, 51, 61

F

Family ∙ 45, 97, 98, 102 FAMILY/CHILDREN ∙ 132 Food shortages ∙ 35 Future ∙ 19 FUTURE/SECURITY ∙ 132

H

Handbills ∙ 100 Happiness ∙ 19, 102 Health ∙ 19 Hindu ∙ 101, 102, 103, 140 HOME BIBLE STUDY ∙ 132 Housing ∙ 35, 36, 45

I

I’M BUSY’ ∙ 134 Ineffective government ∙ 35 INJUSTICE/SUFFERING ∙ 133 Insert ∙ 55, 93 Introductions ∙ 18, 130 Is There a Creator Who Cares About You? ∙ 50, 106

J

Jehovah God ∙ 45 Jesus Christ ∙ 45 Jewish ∙ 95, 103, 104, 121, 122, 140, 141

152

K

Keep on the Watch! ∙ 50 KINGDOM ∙ 133 km 10/06 ∙ 6 km 2/06 ∙ 15 km 4/01 ∙ 3, 12, 80 km 4/07 ∙ 9 km 5/90 ∙ 7 km 5/93 ∙ 16 km 6/99 ∙ 10 km 7/99 ∙ 13 Knowledge Book ∙ 57

L

Learn From the Great Teacher ∙ 51 LIFE/HAPPINESS ∙ 133 Life—How Did It Get Here? ∙ 20, 52, 105, 151 LOVE/KINDNESS ∙ 134

M

Mankind’s Search for God ∙ 52 Meetings for Field Service ∙ 6 Moral breakdown ∙ 35 Muslim ∙ 101, 104

N

Not at Home ∙ 9

O

OLD AGE/DEATH ∙ 134 OWN RELIGION’ ∙ 134

P

Poverty ∙ 35 Prayer ∙ 14, 16, 32, 45, 55, 64, 74, 146

Prejudice ∙ 35 Presentations ∙ 19, 20, 36, 50, 55, 59, 60, 85 Public Places ∙ 81

R

Reasoning ∙ 120 Religion ∙ 46, 137, 147 Religiously ∙ 19 Require Brochure ∙ 56 Return Visits ∙ 39, 66, 78, 150 Ruining of the earth ∙ 35

S

Save ∙ 55, 61 Scriptures Often Misapplied ∙ 142 Sickness ∙ 35, 115 Suggested Field Service Presentations ∙ 2

T

tactful ∙ 119 tactfulness ∙ 107 Telephone ∙ 21, 42, 82, 84, 85 TERRITORY OFTEN WORKED ∙ 135 terrorism ∙ 35 Tracts ∙ 5, 91, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 Tragedy/Suffering ∙ 46

W

War ∙ 35, 46, 103, 104, 106 WAR/PEACE ∙ 134 What Does God Require of Us? ∙ 53, 61, 112 Will This World Survive ∙ 16, 37, 95, 96, 97, 99 Worship the Only True God ∙ 54, 61 writing letters ∙ 88, 93, 94, 108, 109, 151

field service presentations cover · 2019. 8. 19. · 1 effective meetings for field service...

Documents